GOVERNMENT OF THE PAKISTAN WATER AND POWER ISLAMIC REPUBLIC OF PAKISTAN DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY Public Disclosure Authorized GHAZI - BAROTHA HYDROPOWER PROJECT
REPORT ON Public Disclosure Authorized ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES Public Disclosure Authorized ~~~~; 1
August 1994
Public Disclosure Authorized PAKISTAN HYDRO
*_... CONSULTANTS A Joint Venture of - National Engineering Services Pakistan (Pvt) Ltd. - Associated Consulting Engineers ACE (Pvt) Ltd. - Ewbank Preece Ltd. - Harza Engineering Company International L.P. - Binnie & Partners (Overseas)Ltd TABLE OF CONTENTS REPORT ON ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page SUMMARY
S.1 INTRODUCTION S.1 S.2 FISHERIES DEVELOPMENT S.2 S.3 EUTROPHICATION OF BARRAGE POND S.3 S.4 TOWN PLANNING FOR GHAZI AND KHALO S.3 S.5 SEWAGE TREATMENT WORKS FOR GHAZI AND KHALO S.4 S.6 STUDY OF SOILS FOR SPOIL BANKS S.4 S.7 AGRICULTURAL PRODUCTION OF SPOIL BANKS S.4 S.8 500 kV TRANSMISSION LINES S.5 S.9 ACCESS ROAD TO BAROTHA POWER COMPLEX S.5
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL 1.1
1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT 1.1
1.3 PREVIOUS ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES 1.2
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW PANEL 1.2
1.5 SUPPLEMENTARY ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES 1.3
1.6 ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES 1.3
REFERENCES
TABLES
CHAPTER 2 FISHERIES DEVELOPMENT
2.1 INTRODUCTION -2.1 2.1.1 Description of the Project 2.1 2.1.2 Objectives of Study 2.2
2.2 PRESENT FISHERIES 2.3 2.2.1 Riverine Environment 2.3 2.2.2 Fish Species in Indus 2.4 2.2.3 Survey of Commercial Fishermen 2.4
(i) Page
2.2.4 Results of Survey 2.5 2.2.5 Fisheries in Tarbela Reservoir 2.7
2.3 FISHERIES DEVELOPMENT POTENTIAL 2.8 2.3.1 River and Pond Environment 2.8 2.3.2 Suitability of Local Wild and Cultured Fish 2.9
2.4 HATCHERY RESOURCES 2.12
2.5 FISH LADDER AT THE BARRAGE 2.13
2.6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 2.14 2.6.1 Plan to Maximise Fishery Value 2.14 2.6.2 Breeding of Mullah 2.15 2.6.3 Monitoring Development of the Fishery 2.15 2.6.4 Production Targets and Levels of Investment 2.15 2.6.5 Allocation of Fishing Rights 2.18
REFERENCES
TABLES
ANNEX
CHAPTER 3 ASSESSMENT OF RI-SK OF EUTROPHICATION - IN GHAZI BARRAGE POND
3.1 INTRODUCTION 3.1
3.2 QUALITY OF WATER DISCHARGED FROM TARBELA 3.2
3.3 FLOW CHARACTERISTICS IN BARRAGE POND 3.2
3.4 SOURCES OF NUTRIENTS 3.3
3.5 CONCLUSIONS 3.3
APPENDIX
TABLES
CHAPTER 4 TOWN PLANNING FOR GHAZI & KHALO
4.1 INTRODUCTION 4.1 4.1.1 Background 4.1 4.1.2 Purpose of Present Study 4.1 4.1.3 Study Methodology 4.2
(ii) Page
4.2 PHYSICAL SET-UP 4.2 4.2.1 Location 4.2 4.2.2 Climate 4.2 4.2.3 Topography 4.3 4.2.4 Area 4.3 4.2.5 Population 4.3 r 4.3 EXISTING SITUATION 4.3 4.3.1 General 4.3 4.3.2 Sanitary and Environmental Conditions 4.4 4.3.3 Solid Waste Collection and Disposal 4.4 4.3.4 Water Supply System 4.5 4.3.5 Transportation and Traffic 4.5 4.3.6 Health and Education 4.5 4.3.7 Sports and Recreation 4.6 4.3.8 NGOs and Community Participation 4.6 4.3.9 Institutional Setup 4.6
4.4 ACTION PLANS 4.6 4.4.1 General 4.6 4.4.2 Cleaning, Clearing and Improvement of Drains 4.7 4.4.3 Collection and Disposal of Solid Waste 4.7 4.4.4 Removal of Encroachments from Main Road 4.7 4.4.5 Re-surfacing of Main & Access Roads 4.8 4.4.6 Improvement of Bus/Truck Stands 4.8 4.4.7 Construction of Sewers and Drains 4.8 4.4.8 Improvement of Water Supply System 4.8 4.4.9 Provision of Open Spaces 4.9 4.4.10 Tree Planting and Landscaping 4.9
4.5 DEVELOPMENT PLAN 4.9 4.5.1 Introduction 4.9 4.5.2 Development Restrictions 4.10 4.5.3 Long-Term Development Programme 4.10 4.5.4 Summary of Projects in Long-Term Development Programme 4.12 4.5.5 Housing for Migratory Workers 4.13
4.6 CONCLUSIONS 4.13
APPENDICES
CHAPTER 5 SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT FOR GRAZI AND KRALO TOWNS
5.1 INTRODUCTION 5.1 5.1.1 Base Data 5.1 5.1.2 Existing Wastewater Collection System 5.1 5.1.3 Purpose of Present Study 5.2 5.1.4 Planning Study 5.2
(iii) Page
5.2 SEWERAGE SYSTEM 5.2 5.2.1 Concept 5.2 5.2.2 Cost of Sewer System 5.3
5.3 SEWAGE TREATMENT WORKS 5.3 5.3.1 Location 5.3 5.3.2 Selection of Treatment Process 5.3 5.3.3 Design of Treatment Works 5.4
5.4 ESTIMATED COSTS 5.5 5.4.1 Sewer System 5.5 5.4.2 Sewage Treatment Works 5.5 5.4.3 Total Cost 5.5
REFERENCES
TABLES
CHAPTER 6 STUDY OF SOIL FOR SPOIL BANKS
6.1 GENERAL 6.1
6.2 SURVEY METHOD 6.1
6.3 PHYSIOGRAPHY 6.2
6.4 SOIL CHARACTERISTICS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR IMPROVEMENT OF SPOIL BANKS 6.3 6.4.1 General 6.3 6.4.2 Deep to Very Deep Loamy Soils 6.3 6.4.3 Moderately Deep Loamy Soils 6.4 6.4.4 Shallow Loamy Soils 6.4 6.4.5 Deep to Very Deep Sandy Soils 6.5 6.4.6 Moderately Deep Sandy Soils 6.6 6.4.7 Shallow Sandy Soils 6.7 6.4.8 Miscellaneous Areas 6.8
6.5 CROP SUITABILITY RATINGS 6.8 6.5.1 General 6.8 6.5.2 Suitability Classes 6.8
APPENDIX
TABLES
CHAPTER 7 AGRICULTURAL POTENTIAL OF THE SPOIL BANKS
7.1 INTRODUCTION .7.1 7.1.1 Objectives of the Study 7.1
(iv) Page
7.1.2 Methodology 7.1
7.2 PRESENT AGRICULTURE 7.2 7.2.1 Present Cropping Pattern and Intensity 7.2 7.2.2 Present Barani Crop Yields 7.2 7.2.3 Barani Crop Production 7.2 7.2.4 Barani Farm Inputs 7.3 7.2.5 Irrigated Agriculture 7.3
7.3 AGRICULTURE ON SPOIL BANKS 7.3 7.3.1 General 7.3 7.3.2 Proposed Cropping Pattern and Intensities: 7.4 7.3.3 Justification for Selection of Crops 7.5 7.3.4 Crop Yields on the Spoil Banks 7.8 7.3.5 Agriculture Production 7.9 7.3.6 Incremental Production 7.9 7.3.7 Farm Inputs 7.10
7.4 FARM BUDGETS 7.11 7.4.1 General 7.11 7.4.2 Methodology 7.12 7.4.3 Farm Budgets 7.12
7.5 CONCLUSIONS 7.12
REFERENCES
TABLES
CHAPTER 8 TRANSMISSION LINES
8.1 INTRODUCTION 8.1 8.1.1 Project Background 8.1 8.1.2 Regulatory Background 8.1 8.1.3 Approach to the Study 8.2
8.2 LEGAL, REGULATORY AND ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORK 8.3 8.2.1 Legal Framework in Pakistan 8.3 8.2.2 World Bank Requirements 8.5 8.2.3 Public Health/Safety Standards 8.6 8.2.4 WAPDA Transmission Line Organisation 8.7
8.3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 8.8 8.3.1 Terminal Points 8.8 8.3.2 Proposed Routes 8.8 8.3.3 Corridor Treatment 8.10 8.3.4 Towers 8.10 8.3.5 Treatment of the Bypassed Line Section 8.11
(v) Page
8.4 BASELINE CONDITIONS 8.11 8.4.1 Land Use 8.11 8.4.2 Ecological Values 8.14 8.4.3 Socio-Cultural Resources 8.15
8.5 POTENTIAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS 8.22 8.5.1 Land Use 8.22 8.5.2 Vegetation and Wildlife 8.22 8.5.3 Socio-cultural Resources 8.23
8.6 ALTERNATIVES 8.24 8.6.1 No Action Alternative 8.24 8.6.2 Terminal Points 8.24 8.6.3 Routes 8.25 8.6.4 Tower Placement 8.26
8.7 MITIGATION PLAN 8.26 8.7.1 Variations in Alignment 8.26 8.7.2 Resettlement 8.27 8.7.3 Schools 8.28 8.7.4 Other Buildings 8.29 8.7.5 Wells 8.29 8.7.6 Bypassed Section 8.29 8.7.7 Cultural Properties 8.29 8.7.8 Temporary Damage 8.30
8.8 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT 8.30 8.8.1 Management Responsibility 8.30 8.8.2 Implementation Issues 8.31
8.9 MONITORING PLAN 8.32
REFERENCES
APPENDIX
TABLES
CHAPTER 9 ACCESS ROAD FOR BAROTHA POWER COMPLEX
9.1 INTRODUCTION 9.1 9.1.1 Project Background 9.1 9.1.2 Legal, Regulatory, and Administrative Framework 9.1 9.1.3 Status of Road Planning and Design 9.2 9.1.4 Approach to the Study 9.2
9.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 9.3 9.2.1 Objective 9.3 9.2.2 Route 9.3 9.2.3 Road Design 9.4
(vi) Page
9.3 BASELINE CONDITIONS 9.4 9.3.1 Land Use 9.4 9.3.2 Ecological Values 9.5 * 9.3.3 Socio-cultural Conditions 9.5
9.4 POTENTIAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS 9.9 * 9.4.1 General 9.9 9.4.2 Land Use 9.9 9.4.3 Ecological Impacts 9.10 9.4.4 Socio-cultural Resources 9.10
9.5 ALTERNATIVES CONSIDERED 9.12 9.5.1 No Action Alternative 9.12 9.5.2 Alternative Routes 9.12 9.5.3 Alternative Rail Crossings 9.12
9.6 MITIGATION PLAN 9.13 9.6.1 Compensation 9.13 9.6.2 Public Safety 9.14
9.7 MONITORING PLAN 9.14 9.7.1 Land Acquisition and Compensation 9.14 9.7.2 Induced Development 9.14
REFERENCES
TABLES
DRAWINGS
ANNEX 1 FISHERIES SURVEY INTERVIEW FORM
APPENDIX 3-A SURVEY OF EXISTING SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANTS AT TARBELA
APPENDIX 4-Al DRAFT TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR TOWN PLANNING OF GHAZI AND KHALO
APPENDIX 4-A2 TOWN PLANNING OF GHAZI AND KHALO BUDGET ESTIMATE
(vii) APPENDIX 6-A DESCRIPTIONS OF SOIL PROFILE PITS
APPENDIX 8-A REPORT PREPARERS AND PERSONS CONTACTED
(viii) REPORT ON ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
LIST OF TABLES
No. Title Page
1.1 Principal Project Data 1.5
2.1 Fish of the Indus River from Tarbela to Kabul Confluence 2.21
2.2 Feeding and Spawning Habits of Fish Important to Fisheries Development at the Ghazi-Barotha Project 2.24
3.1 Ten-day mean outflows from Tarbela Reservoir (1976-90) 3.12
3.2 Wastewater analyses in Barrage Pond Area 3.13
3.3 Total BOD Load of STPs - Existing and after improvement 3.14
3.4 Cost Estimate for Expansion of Sewage Treatment Plant at Right Bank Colony-Tarbela 3.15
5.1 Wastewater Analysis of Ghazi and Khalo 5.6
5.2 Summary of Cost Estimate for Sewage Treatment Plant at Ghazi and Khalo 5.7
5.3 Estimate of Cost of Sewage Treatment Plant at Ghazi and Khalo 5.8
6.1 Physico-Chemical Analysis of Pit Samples 6.15
6.2 Distribution of Soil Textural Groups 6.17
6.3 Crop Suitability Ratings 6.20
7.1 Existing Barani Cropping Pattern & Intensities 7.15
7.2 Existing Barani Crop Yields 7.16
7.3 Existing Barani Cropped Areas, Yields & Production in Project Area 7.17
7.4 Existing Barani Level of Farm Inputs 7.18
7.5 Existing Barani Level of Manual Labour Requirements 7.19
(ix) No0. Title Page
7.6 Existing Cropping Pattern & Intensities of the Project Area 7.20
7.6A Existing Irrigated Crop Yields 7.21
7.7 Existing Irrigated Cropped Area, Yields & Production in the Project Area 7.22
7.8 Existing Irrigated Level of Farm Inputs 7.23
7.9 Exiting Level of Manual Labour Requirements for Irrigated areas 7.24
7.10 Existing Crop Production 7.25
7.11 Proposed Cropping Pattern, Intensities & Cropped Area "With" Project (For Spoil Banks) (Irrigated) 7.26
7.12 Existing Crop Yields & Adopted Yields (Irrigated & Spoil Banks) 7.27
7.13 Projected Crop Production "With" Project (For Spoil Banks) 7.28
7.14 Incremental Crop Production "With" Project (For Spoil Banks) 7.29
7.15 Projected Seed Requirements "With" Project 7.30
7.16 Projected Fertilizer Requirements "With" Project 7.31
7.17 Plant Protection Measures "With" Project 7.32
7.18 Traction & Manual Labour Per Hectare Required "With" Project 7.33
7.19 Barani Areas Per Hectare Gross Margin (Financial Prices) 7.34
7.20 Spoil Banks Per Hectare Gross Margin (Financial Prices) 7.35
7.21 Farm Budgets at Financial Prices 7.36
8.1 Impacts, Mitigation and Monitoring - Transmission Lines 8.34
9.1 Impacts, Mitigation and Monitoring - Haji Shah Barotha Access Road 9.16
(x) REPORT ON ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
LIST OF DRAWINGS
No. Title
1.1 Project Layout Plan
2.1 Barrage Pond Storage Area and Capacity Curves
2.2 Historical Operation of Tarbela Reservoir
2.3 Plan of Barrage and Pond
2.4 Location of Indus River Tributaries that are Spawning areas for Mahseer.
3.1 Location of Existing Sewage Treatment Plants for Colonies at Tarbela Dam
3.2 Flow Diagram for Sewage Treatment Plant at Sanober Colony Tarbela
3.3 Layout of Existing Sewage Treatment Plant at Sanober Colony
3.4 Layout of Existing Sewage Treatment Plant at Sobra City
3.5 Layout of Existing Sewage Treatment Plant at Right Bank Colony
4.1 Proposed Expansion for Ghazi and Khalo up to 2017
5.1 Proposed Location of Sewage Treatment Plant
5.2 Layout Plan of Proposed Sewaae Treatment Plant for Ghazi and Khalo
5.3 Sections - Secondary Clarifier and Oxidation Ditch for Proposed Sewage Treatment Plant for Ghazi and Khalo
5.4 Section - Sludge Drying Beds for Proposed Sewage Treatment Plant for Ghazi and Khalo
6.1 Power Channel - Logs of Auger Holes
6.2 Power Channel - Logs of Soil Profile Pits
(xi) No. Title
7.1 Existing Cropping Pattern & Calendar (Unirrigated)
7.2 Proposed Cropping Pattern & Calendar for Spoil Banks
8.1 Organisation Plan: WAPDA Transmission System
8.2 Proposed 500 kV Connections Barotha-Peshawar Line (West Half)
8.3 Proposed 500 kV Connections Barotha-Peshawar Line (East Half)
8.4 Proposed 500 kV Connections to Tarbela-Gatti Line
8.5 Transmission Tower Designs
8.6 Power Complex Layout
9.1 Proposed Access Road Haji Shah- Barotha
(xii) SUMMARY SUMMARY
8.1 INTRODUCTION The Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project (the Project) has been designed to use the fall in the Indus river between Tarbela dam and the confluence of the Indus and Haro rivers to generate up to 1,450 MW. The Project comprises a barrage near Ghazi, a 52 km long power channel, and a power complex near Barotha. During the layout, feasibility and design stages of the development of the Project, environmental considerations received close attention. The results of the studies were presented in two reports which were reviewed by an international Environmental Review Panel appointed by the World Bank, who agreed with the main findings. In their Third Report (July 1992), the Environmental Review Panel recommended that certain additional supplementary environmental studies should be carried out. The findings of these studies are presented in this report. The aspects covered are as follows:
- An assessment of the potential for the development of fisheries in the barrage pond and in the headponds at the power complex, the need for a fish ladder at the barrage, and the effects of the reduced flows in the Indus between the barrage and the confluence of the Indus and Kabul rivers on existing fisheries. This is covered in Chapter 2 of this report.
- An assessment of the risk of eutrophication in the barrage pond, possibly caused by discharges of inadequately treated sewage from existing sewerage systems. This is presented in Chapter 3.
- The town planning requirements for Ghazi and Khalo, which together will be affected both by the construction of the Project, particularly the barrage, and by the proximity of the initial length of the power channel. This is presented in Chapter 4.
- A preliminary design and cost estimate for the provision of sewers and sewage treatment works for Ghazi and Khalo. At present, these towns rely on open drains and there is no treatment of the sewage which reaches the Indus. This is presented in Chapter 5.
- A survey of the characteristics of the soils along the route of the power channel, which will be used for the spoil banks. The results are presented in Chapter 6.
- An assessment of the agricultural production which could be achieved on the irrigated spoil banks along the power
S.1 channel, to check whether the loss of production from land required for the channel, most of which is unirrigated, will be offset by the greater productivity of irrigated land. This is presented in Chapter 7.
An assessment of the environmental impact of the 500 kV power transmission lines required to connect the power complex to the WAPDA grid system. This is presented in Chapter 8.
An assessment of the environmental impact of the access road from the Haji Shah road to the power complex at Barotha, to be formed by widening and surfacing an existing unsurfaced road, to provide a route for construction traffic that avoids Attock City. This is presented in Chapter 9.
A study of the legal aspects of the purchase and resale of the land required for the power channel and the spoil banks has been requested by the Panel. The study is in progress and will be reported separately. A summary of the main findings of each study is given below.
S.2 FISHERIES DEVELOPMENT The Project will include a 1,140 ha barrage pond, 540 ha of headponds, and a power channel of 1600 cumecs capacity. On average, 10-day releases from Tarbela are above 1,600 cumecs for 49% of the time (with a maximum of about 7,500 cumecs in the first third of August). Excess flows above 1,600 cumecs will be released into the existing river channel. During the low-flow period (October to April), the discharge in the Indus channel between the barrage and the confluence with the Haro river will average 28 cumecs, plus contributions from seepage and minor tributaries. The flow in the Kabul river averages 820 cumecs. Thus, fishery development will focus on the barrage pond and headponds.
The local fishery, especially the winter fishery, is dominated by the large, herbivorous hill-stream cyprinid Schizothorax plagiostomus, known locally as mullah. It has not been cultured, but culture of this fish should not be difficult because ripe females can be found throughout the year. Consideration of food habits, breeding and temperature requirements of locally native and cultured fish indicated mullah to be the best candidate for fishery development. Common carp (Cyprinus carpio) should feed successfully on benthos in silt. Silver carp (Hypothalmichthys molitrix) and bighead carp (Aristichthys nobilis) can feed on plytoplankton and zooplankton respectively. The major carps, rohu (Labeo rohita) - a column feeder, mrigal (Cirrhinus mrigala) - a bottom feeder, and catla (Catla catla) - a surface feeder, can
S.2 also be added for the purpose of experimentation. These fish are usually cultured in the plains but can adapt in the water bodies of the hilly areas. They will be more successful in the headponds than in the barrage pond.
The potential for enhancing fishery resources has been reviewed, the desirability of a fish ladder examined, and entitlements to fishing rights evaluated. No enhancement to the fishery is envisioned from a fish ladder at the barrage. Enforcement of currently existing licensing requirements would provide a mechanism to allocate fishing rights in the barrage pond.
Surveys of local fishermen and fish retailers revealed that there are only about 17 commercial fishermen working on the Indus between Tarbela dam and the confluence of the Indus and Haro rivers. They generally fish at night, mostly during the winter, and sell their catches next morning in the three local markets. The total annual catch is about 30 t. Many more people fish to supplement their families' diet, and occasionally catch enough to sell some fish. Their annual harvest is about 10 t. This pattern will be adversely affected by the reduction in flows in the Indus during the winter. Only approximate estimates can be made of the productivity of the barrage ponds and headponds. With stocking of fingerlings at 300/ha/year, the total harvest could be 200 t/year, thus exceeding comfortably the present harvest and increasing the present income from fishing by up to six times.
S.3 EUTROPHICATION OF BARRAGE POND
There are two sewage treatment works associated with the Tarbela dam colonies on the left bank, and one on the right bank. The left bank works are producing effluent of satisfactory quality. The right bank works are overloaded, and preliminary designs and cost estimates are presented for an extension, estimated to cost about Rs. 9 million. However, the total BOD load from the sewage works effluent is two orders of magnitude less than that occurring naturally in the releases from Tarbela. The disolved oxygen content of the water from Tarbela is about 50% of the saturation value, while the residence time in the pond ranges from about 3 hours to about 1 day. Thus there is no risk of sewage works discharges causing eutrophication in the barrage pond.
S.4 TOWN PLANNING FOR GHAZI AND KHALO Ghazi, particularly, and Khalo have developed in an unplanned manner as a result of immigration of labour for the construction period of Tarbela dam, and of people displaced from the area submerged by the reservoir. As a result, the road system, the water supply system and the surface and wastewater drainage
S.3 systems are all inadequate. Other features, such as encroachments and the provision of open areas for recreation, need attention. The land area available between the Indus and the power channel will be enough to accomodate the population growth expected over the life of the Project.
Ghazi has recently been granted Tehsil status. This will allow a municipal council to be created and future development to be better organised. The planning needs are described, together with draft terms of reference and a budget for a planning study.
S.5 SEWAGE TREATMENT WORKS FOR GHAZI ANID KHALO The present arrangements for the collection and disposal of wastewater from Ghazi and Khalo are unsatisfactory and unhygenic. A preliminary design and cost estimates have been prepared for a complete sewerage system for the two towns. The treatment 'works would be best located near the left bank of the Indus on low- lying ground adjacent to Khalo. A modified oxidation ditch treatment method is recommended, to be built in three stages as the population of the two towns expands. The total capital cost of the sewers and the first stage of the treatment works has been estimated at about Rs. 42 million. For such a system to work satisfactorily, the present municipal tubewell water supply system would have to be uprated from about 4 hr/day to a 24 hr/day supply.
S.6 STUDY OF SOILS FOR SPOIL BANKS This study investigated the types of soil and their distribution along the route of the power channel. The topsoil and subsoil will be spread on the spoil banks alongside the power channel after levelling, and will therefore be an important factor in the agricultural productivity of the spoil banks. The study showed that the soils are generally of good quality, suitable for agriculture. However, there are certain areas where the soil is of poor quality, and recommendations are made for the improvement of these soils, including the possibility of spreading more suitable soil from elsewhere during the construction of the spoil banks.
S.7 AGRICULTURAL PRODUCTION OF SPOIL BANKS This study has been based on a survey of existing cropping patterns on irrigated and rain-fed (barani) land in the Project area, and on the survey of soil types along the power channel route. The principal conclusion is that farmers should have no difficulty in growing many more crops, including cash crops, on the spoil banks than are grown at present on the barani land. They will require an estimated four years to reach full production.
S.4 To assess the overall effect on farmers' incomes, farm budgets have been prepared for a representative farm size of 3.44 ha, for barani conditions and for irrigated conditions. This shows that the return per hectare can be expected to increase by a factor of nearly 4. This confirms the view of local farmers that replacing barani land with half the area of irrigated land will be beneficial.
S.8 500 kV TRANSMISSION LINES The Project will require three new 500 kV transmission lines, two of which will conduct power from the Barotha switchyard to a switchyard near Peshawar and to a tie-in to the existing Tarbela-Gatti line, respectively. The third line will bring Tarbela power from the Tarbela-Gatti line to the Barotha switchyard.
All three of the lines will pass over cultivated land (mostly in barani agriculture) and undeveloped open areas. They will skirt villages by at least 500 m, but will require the moving of a few house compounds and some tubewells. These structures will be replaced at Project expense. Cultivation, grazing, and fuelwood gathering will continue within the rights-of-way, including the areas between the legs of the towers. An archaeological survey will be conducted prior to the final siting of towers. In the immediate vicinity of the Power Complex at Barotha, the Barotha-Peshawar line will leave the switchyard on the west side, turn north to avoid the village of Dher by 500 m, and cross the Indus river just north of Dher and Mandori. The two lines connecting with the Tarbela-Gatti line will be aligned along the Indus flood plain, west of Barotha, then around to the east. The Barotha primary school, which is within about 25 m of the boundary of the proposed switchyard, will be moved to the resettlement village, about 500 m south of its present location.
S.9 ACCESS ROAD TO BAROTHAPOWER COMPLEX The purpose of the new access will be to allow heavy construction traffic travelling from the Grand Trunk Road to the power complex site at Barotha to bypass Attock City. This will reduce journey times and avoid increasing the congestion in the narrow roads of the city, with the associated risks to pedestrians and other road users.
The new road will follow a centuries old dirt road, known as the Old Sarkari road, that is largely on government owned-land. The new road will be a two-lane, metalled (asphalt) road, with each lane 3.3 m wide. The shoulders will be of compacted gravel 1.8 m wide on each side. The right-of-way (r.o.w.) will extend 10 m farther on each side, giving it a total width of 30.2 m. The extra strip of land on each side has been included to accommodate
S.5 a drainage ditch, a borrow area for the maintenance of the road berms and for the planting of trees to form a green belt similar to that on the WAPDA road from Lawrencepur to Tarbela. The road will contain one bridge, where it crosses the Attock-Peshawar railway line.
The new r.o.w. will total 21.9 ha. Of this area, the total amount of land changing from agriculture to road right-of-way will be approximately 19.8 ha. The new road will utilize the r.o.w. of the Old Sarkari road for 6.4 km, the average width of which is only about 3.2 m, giving a nominal area of 2.1 ha.
The required land, including about 7.3 ha that does not contain the Old Sarkari road, will be purchased from the owners at current market prices. WAPDA will negotiate directly with landowners to establish prices for land. Landowners will be entitled to compensation at full market price, plus the 15% escalation stipulated in the 1894 Land Acquisition Act. The Project Non-Government Organisation (PNGO) will assist landowners to reach agreement with WAPDA on market prices.
Rural landless groups whose income is adversely affected will be compensated under the Project Regional Action Plan (RAP).
The barani lands crossed by the proposed access road route have little ecological value, so there will be no significant ecological effects. There will be a slightly increased risk of accidents on the Attock-Haji Shah Road at the entrance to the new road, due to heavy trucks turning into the new road. This risk will be ameliorated by appropriate safety measures.
An Emergency Action Plan will be incorporated into the Project safety programme to cover accidents, spills or other mishaps along the access road.
S.6 CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL This Report presents the results of additional supplementary environmental studies of the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project (the Project). This report forms an additional supplement to the Environmental Assessment Report (EAR) that was prepared as part of the feasibility studies for the Project and constituted Volume 7 of the Feasibility Report (Ref. 1.1). The draft EAR was reviewed by an Environmental Review Panel in May 1991. The recommendations of the Panel formed the basis for supplementary studies that were presented in a separate Report (Ref. 1.2). The Project was called the Ghazi-Gariala Hydropower Project until late in 1991, when the name was changed by WAPDA at the request of the people of Barotha. The Project is described in the EAR and, in greater detail, in various other volumes of the Feasibility Report. For convenience, a brief description of the Project is provided here.
1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT The Project will be located in the eastern part of Pakistan's North West Frontier Province and the northern part of the Punjab Province. It consists of three main components: a barrage, a power channel and a power complex (Drawing 1.1). The main features of the Project are summarised in Table 1.1. The barrage will be located on the Indus river about 7 km downstream of Tarbela dam, just upstream of the village of Ghazi. It will create a pond with a maximum surface area of 1,140 ha at the normal pond level of El. 340.0 m. During the low-flow season (October to April), when the average daily release from Tarbela is less than the power channel capacity, the barrage pond will provide diurnal re-regulation to ensure a constant flow in the power channel. During this period, the pond level will fluctuate daily by up to 3.3 m. Water from the barrage pond will be delivered to the power channel through a head regulator. The power channel will have a capacity of 1,600 cumecs (56,500 cusecs) as against the 2,000 cumecs proposed in the Feasibility Report. The capacity was reduced as a prudent measure in view of the limited experience of channels of this capacity. The power channel will be a concrete-lined, trapezoidal structure approximately 94 m across at the water surface and 9 m deep. It will flow at a velocity of 2.33 m/s and a gradient of 1:9,600 to a forebay which forms the start of the power complex, near Barotha.
1.1 The power complex will include two headponds, to allow peaking operation while maintaining channel flows uniform, a spillway, an intake structure, 5 penstocks, a powerhouse with 5x290 MW turbine-generators, and a tailrace channel to discharge the water back into the Indus. Following the reduction in the capacity of the power channel to 1,600 cumecs, studies showed that there would be advantages in increasing the live storage capacity of the headponds from about 16 M cu m, as proposed in the Feasibility report, to about 25 M cu m. This capacity allows the Project to function as a peaking project, generating around 1,350 to 1,450 MW for 4 hours each day, and reduced power during the rest of the day, depending on the availability of water from Tarbela. During the high-flow season, when the average daily flow released by Tarbela is greater than the 1,600 cumecs capacity of the power channel, the barrage will release excess flows through undersluices and standard bays. When Tarbela delivers less water than the capacity of the channel, the barrage will release a minimum 28 cumecs of compensation water, some of which will be from seepage under the barrage.
1.3 PREVIOUS ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES The environmental assessment of the Project began during the layout phase of the feasibility studies, and is expected to continue, in one form or another, throughout the life of the Project.
During the layout phase, attention was focused on the siting and preliminary design of the main components, the locations of the channel crossings, public safety, and the avoidance of impacts on villages, shrines and graveyards. During this stage an excellent working relationship was established between the planning engineers and the environmental staff that resulted in early attention to potential problems. Scoping meetings were held with provincial and district officials. In the subsequent phase of the feasibility study, scoping sessions were held at the Union Council and village levels. Various aspects related to land, water and biological resources, and the socioeconomic conditions of the Project area were studied. These aspects, along with resettlement and other mitigation measures, were discussed in the Environmental Assessment Report (Ref. 1.1).
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW PANEL Following review of the draft EAR by an international Environmental Review Panel appointed by the World Bank for the Project, the Panel recommended certain supplementary studies to develop operational criteria for discharge of compensation water and for the management of the created impoundments.
1.2 1.5 SUPPLEMENTARY ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES The supplementary studies were carried out in the period from October 1991 to January 1992 and comprised the following:
- Ecology of the Indus river Flood Plain. More data was collected on the flora and fauna of islands, bars, and pools in the braided reach of the Indus between Tarbela dam and the Kabul river.
- River Water Quality. Resampling of the river and analysis for BOD 5 and coliform bacteria, combined with recalculation of future sewage discharges and in-stream dilution factors, was carried out to refine the calculation of compensation water requirements.
- Public Health. A study was carried out of the effect of changes in river flows, and the creation of the barrage pond and headponds, on mosquito habitats and the incidence of malaria. The possibility of an increase in the incidence of guinea worm was also studied.
- Animal Health. The effects of alteration of surface water conditions on the distribution and transmission of fasciola parasites in buffalo, sheep and goats were studied.
- Indus River Gorge. Possible effects of the Project on the resources of the stretch of the Indus river immediately downstream of its confluence with the Kabul river were investigated.
- Archaeological Surveys. Proposed borrow areas were examined by an archaeological team to ensure that no valuable sites will be destroyed or artifacts lost.
The results of these additional studies are presented in the Report on Supplementary Environmental Studies (Ref. 1.2).
1.6 ADDITIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
In July 1993, the World Bank and the Environmental Review Panel recommended that additional supplementary environmental studies be carried out. This work was started in January 1994. This report presents the findings of these studies. The aspects covered are as follows:
- An assessment of the potential for the development of fisheries in the barrage pond and in the headponds at the power complex, and the effects of the reduced flows in - the Indus between the barrage and the confluence of the Indus and the Kabul rivers on existing fisheries. This is covered in Chapter 2 of this report.
1.3 An assessment of the risk of eutrophication in the barrage pond, possibly caused by discharges of inadequately treated sewage from existing sewerage systems. This is presented in Chapter 3. The town planning requirements for Ghazi and Khalo, which together will be affected both by the construction of the Project, particularly the barrage, and by the proximity of the initial length of the power channel. This is presented in Chapter 4. A preliminary design and cost estimate for the provision of sewers and sewage treatment works for Ghazi and Khalo. At present, these towns rely on open drains and there is no treatment of the sewage which reaches the Indus. The discharges would adversely affect the quality of the water in the Indus during the low-flow season. This is presented in Chapter 5. An assessment of the agricultural production which could be achieved on the irrigated spoil banks along the power channel, to check whether the loss of production from land required for the channel, most of which is unirrigated, will be offset by the greater productivity of irrigated land. This is presented in Chapters 6 and 7. An assessment of the environmental impact of the 500 kV power transmission lines required to connect the power complex to the WAPDA grid system. This is presented in Chapter 8.
An assessment of the environmental impact of an access road from the Haji Shah road to the power complex, to be formed by widening and surfacing an existing unsurfaced road. This road is required to provide a suitable access to the power complex for construction traffic. This is presented in Chapter 9.
A study of the legal aspects of the purchase and resale of land required for the power channel and the spoil banks is being conducted by a legal expert and will be reported separately.
REFERENCES
1.1 Pakistan Hydro Consultants; Ghazi-Gariala Hydropower Project, Feasibility Report, Volume 7: Environmental Assessment, August 1991. 1.2 Pakistan Hydro Consultants; Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project, Report on Supplementary Environmental Studies, July 1992.
1.4 TABLE 1.1
PRINCIPAL PROJECT DATA Page 1 of 2
BARRAGE
Area of pond at normal pond level 1,140 ha Normal pond level 340.0 m Maximum (survival flood) pond level 341.5 m Live storage volume 62 M cu m Low-flow season range in water level 3.3 m Maximum depth 14 m Design flood discharge capacity 18,700 cumecs Survival flood discharge capacity 46,200 cumecs Construction flood 14,500 cumecs Bridge carriageway width 9.3 m Gates (No x width x height): Standard bays 20 x 18.3 mn x 8.3 m Undersluices 8 x 18.3 m x 3.5 in Head regulator 8 x 18.3 m x 7.5 m
POWER CHANNEL
Design flow 1,600 cumecs Longitudinal slope 1:9,600 Length 52.0 km Full supply depth 9.0 m Side slope 1V:2H Width at water surface 94.4 m Water velocity 2.33 m/s Freeboard of concrete lining 1.5 m Tail regulator gates (No x width x height) 4 x 18.3 m x 9.5 m Total excavation 76 M cu m Service road width 10 m Embankment width retained by WAPDA 25 m each side Road bridges 34 Railway bridges . 1 Pedestrian crossings 12 Superpassages: design flood (no overflow) 500 years Number 26 Culverts 1 Nullah inlets 18 Escapes 5 Permanent land requirement: agricultural 950 ha industrial (Kamra complex) 53 ha Temporary land requirement 1,640 ha Tubewells on spoil banks (No x capacity) 150 x 7 1/s
1.5 PRINCIPAL PROJECT DATA Page 2 of 2
POWER COMPLEX
Turbine/generators (Francis) 5 No x 290 MW Total generation capacity 1,450 MW Total design flow 2,300 cumecs Average annual energy output 6,600 GWh Penstock diameter 10.6 m Forebay/headponds: area 540 ha normal water level 334.0 m minimum water level 329.0 m live storage volume 25.5 M cu m total embankment length 8.6 km Spillway capacity 1,600 cumecs Tailrace: bed width 100 m invert level 255.0 m slope 1:7000 Tailwater levels: minimum 260.0 m flood of record 275.5 m (pre-Kalabagh) Bridges across tailrace 1 Land requirements: structures 236 ha headponds and embankments 614 ha permanent colony 50 ha access road from Haji Shah 19 ha
1.6 CHAPTER 2
FISHERIES DEVELOPMENT CHAPTER 2
FISHERIES DEVELOPMENT
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.1 Description of the Project
The Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project (the Project) will be located on the Indus river in the northwestern part of Pakistan, downstream of the existing Tarbela dam. The Project will develop for power generation the hydraulic head available between the tailrace at Tarbela and the confluence of the Indus and Haro rivers. In this reach, the Indus river drops by 76 m in a distance of 63 km. The Project comprises three basic components:
- a barrage, located about 7 km downstream of Tarbela, forming a pond that will allow diurnal re-regulation of the discharges from Tarbela and diverting water to
- a 52-km-long concrete-lined power channel of 1,600 cumecs capacity, (58.4 m bottom width, 9.0 m depth, 2:1 side slopes, 2.33 m/s velocity) located on the left bank of the Indus and following a uniform gradient to
- a 1,450 MW power complex, including two headponds, that will generate power and discharge the water back into the Indus river just above its confluence with the Haro river. Diversion of river flow for the Project will commence with pond filling and channel testing, which are scheduled to begin in May 1999. Testing of the first unit is scheduled to begin in December 1999. Full operation will begin eight months later when the fifth unit is commissioned.
During the construction period, flows in the Indus river downstream of Tarbela will follow roughly the same route as they do currently. Beginning in August 1995, there will be temporary redirection of flow in the vicinity of the barrage site. A cofferdam will be constructed to allow left bank structures to be built. Two years later, this cofferdam will be removed, a cofferdam will be constructed to allow building right bank structures, and discharge from Tarbela will be passed through undersluice bays. After the barrage is closed, flows in excess of 1,600 cumecs will be discharged into the existing Indus river channel. During the low-flow season, there will be a minimum average flow of 28 cumecs released as compensation flow. This average flow will probably be released in pulses to assist in the maintenance of water quality downstream and in the control of disease vectors.
2.1 The Project will have an installed generating capacity of 1,450 MW, with an average annual energy output of 6,600 million kWh. The powerhouse will contain five power units of 290 MW each. Project features available for fisheries development include 540 ha of headponds at the power complex and 1,140 ha of barrage pond. The normal operation of the Project will comprise:
- discharging excess flows through the barrage during the high-flow period when the average daily discharge exceeds the power channel capacity;
- re-regulating the daily peaking discharges from Tarbela within the barrage pond during the low-flow period;
- during each 10-day period during which the total daily discharge from Tarbela is defined by irrigation requirements, releasing a constant flow into the power channel by appropriate operation of the head regulator gates;
- maintaining full supply level at the downstream end of the power channel, by appropriate operation of the tail regulator gates;
- operating the turbines at higher discharges during peak hours, drawing on water stored in the headponds, and
- outside peak hours, reducing turbine output in order to allow the flow in the channel to refill the headponds before the next peak demand period. Peaking operations during low flows will produce daily fluctua- tions of as much as 3.3 m in the barrage pond elevation and 200 ha of its area (Drawing 2.1, El. 336.7 to 340 m). Barrage pond levels will not fluctuate significantly during high flows. The headponds will fluctuate by about 2.0 m per day at high flows and by as much as 5.0 m per day at low flows.
2.1.2 Objectives of Study
The Third Report of the Environmental Review Panel of the World Bank for the Ghazi-Barotha Project (Annex VIII, Item 8 (f), July 1992) recommended:
"WAPDA is also requested to prepare a study, following recommendation of the World Wide Fund for Nature (Pakistan) to evaluate current and potential fishery resources in the greater Project area. The study would review current fish populations and fishing activities in the study area. It would include a review of the potential for enhancing fishery resources following
2.2 completion of the barrage at Ghazi and the headponds of the Power Complex at Barotha by stocking them with one or more native fish species. The study should also examine if a fish ladder or other means of access is required to the barrage pond from the river below. The study should also evaluate which parties would be entitled to fishing rights in the barrage pool and headpond." Therefore, the objectives of this study were to:
- review current fish populations and fishing activities in the Project area;
- review potential for enhancing fishery resources after completion of the Project by stocking with native fish species;
- examine if a fish ladder should be provided at the barrage, and
- evaluate which parties would be entitled to fishing rights in the barrage pool and headponds.
2.2 PRESENT FISHERIES 2.2.1 Riverine environment In the Project area, between Tarbela dam and the confluence with the Haro river, the Indus is divided into three distinct zones: = a braided alluvial channel, from Tarbela to Khairabad;
- Attock gorge, from Khairabad to Darwazai, and = an alluvial basin, from Darwazai to the confluence with the Haro river.
In the first zone, the Indus flows in a broad (2 to 5 km wide) braided alluvial channel before joining the Kabul river and entering Attock gorge. This zone is characterised by a variety of morphological features including islands (belas) at various stages of formation and vegetative cover. These range from belas which are rarely flooded and have well-established woodland, to bare bars of sand and gravel which are flooded every year. During the low-flow season, this zone also includes river creeks and isolated ponds encircled by bars; these features are subject to change by erosion and deposition during each flood season. These morphological features make this zone favourable for fishing.
The Indus below Khairabad flows in a deep and narrow channel with steep and rocky banks. These features, together with the strong currents, restrict fishing. Moreover, the Punjab Fisheries Department has applied an embargo on fishing in these zones.
2.3 The effects of the Project on fisheries in the Indus river will therefore be limited to the first zone, between Tarbela dam and the confluence with the Kabul river.
2.2.2 Fish Species in Indus The fisheries literature relating to northern Pakistan was comprehensively reviewed. Information on fisheries in Tarbela Reservoir and the Indus river in the Project area was also obtained from interviews of Dr. William George, Director of Fisheries for the Water and Power Development Authority (WAPDA) and Muhammad Baqar Chauhan, Assistant Director of Fisheries in charge of the WAPDA fish hatchery at Ghazi. Table 2.1 presents a summary of all the fish species that have been found in the Indus between Tarbela dam and the confluence of the Indus and Kabul rivers. This information is based on existing literature, discussions with WAPDA Fisheries, Provincial Fisheries Departments and local fishermen.
2.2.3 Survey of Commercial Fishermen
Commercial fishermen in the vicinity of the Project were surveyed during the period February 1-6, 1994. Commercial fishermen were located by visits to markets, interviews of village leaders, and observations during a boat journey from Tarbela to the confluence of the Kabul river. A questionnaire (Annex I) was administered to each fisherman. Among the 40 villages along the left bank between Tarbela and Attock Khurd (Drawing 1.1), 24 villages on the right bank, and five villages in the vicinity of the powerhouse site, 16 commercial fishermen were located from the 17 villages that were visited, as shown on the following table.
NUMBER OF COMMERCIAL FISHERMEN IN VARIOUS VILLAGES ALONG THE INDUS
LEFT BANK NUMBER OF RIGHT BANK NUMBER OF POWERHOUSE NUMBER OF VILLAGES FISHERMEN VILLAGES FISHERMEN VICINITY FISHERMEN
Ghazi 0 Galla 1 Barotha 1 Khalo 0 Pontia 0 Dher 0 Isa 1 Zarobai 1 Jaba 0 Hasanpur 2 Bata Kara 4 Abu-Bakar 1 Amber 0 Haroon 1 Topi 0 Ghurghushti 1 Hund 3
An additional commercial fisherman was located on the river who was from Beka Dheri on the right bank. Most of the fishermen were located while they were fishing on the river. Villagers
2.4 were often reluctant to discuss fishing activity because most fishermen were unlicensed. Among the 17 fishermen interviewed, only two had purchased the required license that costs Rs. 100/year. In addition, many village households along the river fish once or twice a week to provide for their domestic needs. These people generally consume the fish they catch and sell locally only if they happen to catch an excess.
2.2.4 Results of Survey Most of the commercial fishermen who were interviewed were members of joint families where some family member attended to the main occupation while another was fishing. Frequently, brothers would take turns attending to fishing or agriculture. he division of labour among joint family members was 47% agriculture, 37% fishing, 12% service or labour and 4% business. only 12% of those interviewed (ie 2 fishermen) were full-time fishermen. Most (59%) were from families of 4 to 6 persons. Families of three or fewer persons accounted for 29% of the survey total and families of 11 or more persons accounted for 12%. All fishing is done with nylon gillnets. Most fishing is done daily during November through February, but some fishing occurs during all months of the year except June, July and August, when fishing is closed by the government. High water levels in September also interfere with fishing. The fishermen prefer to fish in shallow, slow moving water. Winter days are better for catching and selling fish because the fishermen have no ice or refrigeration. Moreover, the people are in the habit of eating fish during winter. The fishermen begin fishing in the late afternoon and continue through the night. The next morning, they take the fish to the nearest market. Fish markets are located in Ghazi, Topi and Zaida. Some fish are also sent to Haripur. Most (65%) of the fishermen travel by bus 5 km or less from the fishing location to the market, 29% travel 6-10 km and 6% travel more than 10 km. The transportation costs are Rs. 2 or less for 35% of the fishermen who either do not use public transport or use it for a short distance only, Rs. 9 to 11 for 30% and Rs. 12 or more for those who travel 6 km or more.
The large cyprinid Schizothorax plagiostomus, known locally as mullah, accounts for most of the catch. Interviews of fishermen and shopkeepers revealed the fishermen receive Rs. 17-25/kg from shopkeepers, who sell the fish to the public at Rs. 20-27/kg. Shopkeepers pay fishermen Rs. 35-40/kg for other species, which are sold retail at Rs. 45-50/kg. The fishermen report that mullah is much more abundant than other fish because it is well-adapted to the cold temperatures found
2.5 in this part of the Indus river. It also is well-adapted to fast currents by virtue of a lower lip reflected back from the jaw to form a papillated adhesive plate that they can use to attach themselves to rock substrates (Ref. 2.1). They have an abundant food supply because they feed on the algal slime (periphyton) covering the rocks. Fishermen report that mullah breeds throughout the year. They commonly grow to 2 kg and may attain 6 kg. The following table presents survey data on mullah sizes and catches. MAXIMUM LENGTH AND WEIGHT OF MULLAH % OF RESPONDENTS MAXIMUMLENGTH (cm) MAXIMUM WEIGHT (kg) 71 44-55 1-2 23 60-65 3-4 6 80-100 5-6 The median total weight of the daily catch is about 10 kg. The range in total daily catches is summarised below.
RANGE OF TOTAL CATCH OF MULLAH
% OF RESPONDENTS TOTAL WEIGHT OF CATCH (kg) 6 2-4 36 4-8 29 9-12 23 13-20 6 21 or more During an entire week of fishing during the prime (winter) season, the typical fisherman will catch only one or two fish of other species. These will usually also be large cyprinids, such as common carp or chaina (Cyrpinus carpio), chhali (Labeo dero), mahseer (Tor putitora) and shoondal (Recoma labiata). During warm weather, these species become slightly more abundant and additional species appear, including silver carp (Hypophthalmichthvs molitrix), sheer mahi (Clupisoma naziri), sulemani (Glyptothorax puniabensis), daula (Channa punctata) and dauli (Channa gachua).
These additional species may move up from downstream or may be released from Tarbela reservoir when the spillway is opened during summer. All these species breed during the summer. Maximum sizes of these species, as reported by fishermen, are shown on the following table.
2.6 MAXIMUM LENGTH AND WEIGHT OF FISH OTHER THAN MULLAH
SPECIES LENGTH (cm) WEIGHT (kg) Mahseer 60 2.5 Chhali 30 1 Shoondal 70 5 to 6 Common carp 75 12 Silver carp 80 12 Sheer mahi 20 0.3 Sulemani 20 0.5 Daula 30 0.5 Dauli 20 0.3
2.2.5 Fisheries in Tarbela Reservoir The temperature regime at Tarbela is a challenge to fishery development because it is intermediate between warm water and cold water conditions. Most large cyprinids cultured in south Asia are warm water 'species with preferred temperatures in the range of 22 to 30 C. This part of the Indus river has temperatures of 17 to 20 C during summer and 9 to 11 C during winter. Fish production is also limited by a V-shaped bottom that limits the penetration of sunlight to the productive bottom area. Sixty percent of the shoreline is rocky and steep. Maximum depth of the reservoir is about 120 m, and temperature stratification may occur in summer. Annual fish production is 100 tonnes from Tarbela (4 kg/ha at full pool), as opposed to 880 tonnes from Mangla (WAPDA's other major reservoir), even though the two reservoirs are similar in area. Ninety percent of the Tarbela fishery depends on the Khalabat pocket, a shallow bay in the southeast portion of the reservoir that is fed by the Siran river. The Siran river is likely to be the breeding grounds for mahseer caught in Tarbela.
Common carp and mahseer make up most of the Tarbela fishery, with the former being the most common; it often grows to 10 kg and may attain 20 kg. Mahseer is next commonest, and usually grows up to 2 kg. WAPDA has had good success with stocking common carp and silver carp. Silver carp ranks third in the fishery and grows up to 8 kg. Mrigal (Cirrhinus mricaala) and rohu (Labeo rohita) make up 5% of the catch. Tilapia (Oreochromis mossambicus) were introduced accidentally, are reproducing, and make up 7% of the catch. Catla catla was tried without success during 1988-1990. Mullah is not common in the Khalabat pocket, but it is common upstream and downstream.
2.7 2.3 FISHERIES DEVELOPMENT POTENTIAL 2.3.1 River and Pond Environment
Schemes for development of fisheries in conjunction with the Ghazi-Barotha Project must take into account the changed environment that will exist after the Project is in operation. On the average, 10-day releases from Tarbela are above 1,600 cumecs for about 49% of the time. Releases above 1,600 cumecs will be spilled from the barrage pond into the existing Indus river channel. During the low-flow period that begins about the middle of October and continues until early May (Drawing 2.2), the average discharge in the existing Indus river channel downstream from the barrage will be 28 cumecs, plus about one cumec from the Badri Khwar (Drawing 1.1), groundwater seepage into the channel, and the discharge of the Kabul river. The Kabul river 10-day average discharges vary from 280 to 2,300 cumecs during this period and average 820 cumecs.
Low flows in the Indus and good fishing conditions similar to present winter flows will occur during May, September and early October. During cool months, when most fishing now occurs, fishing in the Project area will take place in the barrage pond, the headponds, in deep pools between the barrage and the Kabul river, and throughout the Indus river below the Attock gorge. There will also be changes in substrate type in the Project area. At present, the Indus river bed is rock, gravel and sand. The right bank of the barrage pond area is rocky. The left bank is composed of finer particles. The headponds will be constructed with steeply sloping banks, protected in the wave zone with riprap. The embankments will enclose on three sides the gradually sloping bottom of the natural ground surface which includes silty, sandy, gravelly and rocky areas. Silt will not accumulate in the power channel due to the high water velocities, but will accumulate in the headponds and barrage pond. A silt substrate is usually more productive of bottom-dwelling (benthic) insects and other organisms than a sand or rock substrate, but is less productive than a gravel substrate. Tarbela reservoir currently traps most of the silt that is transported down the river. The sediment delta is about 14 km upstream of the dam. In the initial years of the Project (up to about 2015), before sand starts passing through Tarbela, the silts and clays will fill the dead storage within most of the barrage pond to about El. 332 m (Drawing 2.3) during late May and early June when high sediment outflow will occur with moderate flows. Subsequently, as flows increase during July and August, material will be eroded from the bed of the pond, but the limit of erosion is likely to be around El. 329 m. After about 2015, when large quantities of clay, silt and fine sand will be discharged from Tarbela at the end of May and the beginning of June, a residual channel will be created in the
2.8 pond, whose cross section will be determined mainly by the dominant discharge from Tarbela each flood season.
From July until the following May, almost no coarse sediment will be discharged from Tarbela. In May and June, large concentrations of sediment are expected to reduce temporarily the size of the residual channel until a balance is reached with the sediment transport capacity of the steeper channel. This channel will then be eroded by the increasing flows until these reach their maximum in August. Water quality data collected in and near the Project area during the summer and winter of 1974 (Ref. 2.2) indicated water quality suitable for fisheries development. The pH is slightly alkaline. Total alkalinity was less than 50 mg/l during winter, indicating low productivity, but some summertime measurements were 320 to 400 mg/l. There is some evidence of organic enrichment in the Project area. Dissolved oxygen levels vary, probably due to stratification in the reservoir. Measurements in 1974 in and near the Project area were as low as 4.9 mg/l in the summer and 5.5 mg/l in the winter. However, values of about 7.3 mg/l were recorded in January 1994 (Table 3.2). Measurements of 5-day BOD at Tarbela during January 1994 were 34 to 42 mg/l. BOD may have been influenced by withdrawing water from the bottom of the reservoir.
2.3.2 Suitability of Local Wild and Cultured Fish General Mullah, mahseer, common carp, major carps and Chinese carps are important species in fisheries of the Indus river and Tarbela reservoir. Examination of their feeding and breeding requirements (Table 2.2), their temperature preferences and their geographic distributions provided strong indications of which species would be best adapted to the barrage pond and headponds of the Ghazi-Barotha Project.
Mullah, common carp, and the Chinese carps: bighead carp and silver carp, are well adapted to the temperature regime and have feeding habits that allow them to use specific niches that will be available in the Project ponds. The Chinese carps and, perhaps, common carp will not reproduce naturally in the Project ponds and will require hatchery inputs of fingerlings. The major carps: catla, rohu and mrigal, can also be tried as an experiment initially and, depending upon their success, subsequently. Mullah, which currently dominates the fishery in this part of the Indus, could fare well on the stony banks of the barrage pond and the riprap on the banks of the headponds. They might also do well in the concrete-lined power channel, although they would not be available to fishermen until they moved into one of the ponds. When silt accumulates in the bottom of the barrage pond, common carp may successfully colonize this area.
2.9 Silver carp and bighead carp would be the open-water feeders best suited for the Project area. The major carps are naturally found in the lower parts of the Indus, but could be introduced. They have been successfully introduced in India in reservoirs up to about 1,300 m above sea level (Ref. 2.3), so could also be introduced. Discussions of individual species or species groups are presented below.
Mullah (Schizothorax plagiostomus)
Mullah, which currently is the dominant fish harvested from the Project area, is specially adapted to life in rocky streams with swift currents. It occurs in hill streams along the Himalaya from Assam through Pakistan. It also occurs in Afghanistan and farther west, usually at an altitude above 670 m (Ref. 2.4). Its papillated labial plate aids it in maintaining position on rocks, while the lower jaw is sharp and covered by a thick horny pad for scraping periphyton (Ref. 2.1). The papillated labial plate develops through a slow and gradual process; it is poorly developed in early stages of development (Ref. 2.4). Stomach contents have included Spiroayra, coryxids, sponges and debris (Ref. 2.5). Hora (Ref. 2.6) commented: "Its horizontal paired fins, flattish ventral surface and papillated lower lip are modified for the purpose of adhesion; whereas its subcylindrical body is adapted to offer the least resistance to rushing currents ...[it) is a powerful swimmer and can dart from rock to rock with great rapidity. It prefers to live among rocks on the sloping side of a rapid over which water rushes with great speed." Butt (Ref. 2.7) expressed the opinion that "these are the most suitable fish for the commercial exploitation of bodies of water of the region". Mullah apparently breeds more than once,a year (Ref. 2.8). It tolerates temperatures of 8 to 22 C (Ref. 2.9).
Utilization of this species will require basic research into its biology and ecology, including breeding seasons and methods of propagation. Because it is said to breed throughout the year, hatchery facilities could be used during winter for breeding of this species. Running-ripe females were found at the Project area in the first week of February 1994. Mahseer (Tor putitora)
Mahseers are highly prized game and food fish, but they are unlikely to be a successful species for fishery development at Ghazi-Barotha, because they are not abundant in that reach of the Indus river and water temperatures are probably well below optimal. The species are not captured in great numbers from the Indus river downstream of Tarbela, but it is the second most important fish in the Khalabat pocket fishery in Tarbela reservoir. Little is known of its reproductive habits, but Mirza
2.10 (Ref. 2.9) identified the Siran river, the flooded lower valley of which forms the Khalabat pocket, as one of four streams in NWFP where young ones were collected during November and December. It is almost certain that Mahseer migrates long distances upstream to spawn. Because the fish has thrived in Khalabat pocket, optimal temperatures for mahseer are probably warmer than temperatures in the rest of Tarbela reservoir or the Indus river. The predominately carnivorous feeding habits of this species (Ref. 2.10) would also limit the amount of production that could be harvested from Project waters. Common Carp (Cyprinus carpio) Common carp can tolerate a wide range of temperature (0°C to more than 40 0 C), but it is best adapted to conditions farther downstream on the Indus because the most suitable temperature is in the range of 23 to 290 C (Ref. 2.7). Common carp would also be tolerant of silt deposited on the bottom of the barrage pond, and will feed on tubificids, oligochaetes and chironomid larvae living in the silt. major Carps
The major carps rohu (Labeo rohita), mrigal or morakhi (Cirrhinus mriqala), and catla or theila (Catla catla) are widely cultured in Pakistan and nearby countries. The fish hatchery at Ghazi produces rohu and mrigal. These fish breed naturally in flooded fields on river margins. Hypophisation is required to breed them in a hatchery. Although these species are native to the Indus river, they are not common in the Project area because of the cool temperatures (Ref. 2.2). Labeo dero, a species similar to L. rohita, frequently occurs in the Project area, but is not abundant. While L. rohita usually thrives below an altitude of 550 m, L. dero inhabits torrential hill-streams in shallow waters (Ref. 2.4).
Major carps are common farther downstream, where water temperatures are more often in the optimal range of 20 to 300 C (Ref. 2.7 & 2.8). Because it feeds on decaying vegetation, mrigal would not be suitable for the Project area unless some type of vegetation could be cultivated on the banks of the barrage pond that would tolerate daily fluctuations in water level that are expected during November through April. Rohu is a column and bottom feeder, more omnivorous than mrigal, but still consumes a preponderance of plant matter (Ref. 2.4 & 2.11). The major carps catla, rohu and mrigal may also be tried for experimentation in the first instance. If these are successful, they should be stocked regularly.
2.11 Chinese Carps
Grass carp (Ctenopharvnaodon idella), silver carp (Hvpophthalmichthvs molitrix) and bighead carp (Aristichthys nobilis) are frequently cultured with common carp and major carps. Their gill arches are modified to specialized feeding apparati. Grass carp has grinding molars and feeds on vegetation. Silver carp and bighead carp have filtering systems that allow bighead carp to feed on zooplankton (small crustaceans) and silver carp to feed on phytoplankton (unicellular algae). Because they occur naturally as far north as the Amur river watershed on the China-Russia border, they would be likely to be well adapted to the cool temperatures at the Project site. Food would be a limitation.
Grass carp tend to be omnivorous but they would find little vegetative forage available. During most of the year, the Tarbela reservoir and the Indus river are clear, and silver carp or bighead carp could have their scope for growth limited by a sparse food supply. Silver carp is a competitor for food with catla, which have declined in abundance after silver carp were stocked into reservoirs in Madhya Pradesh, India (Ref. 2.4).
Stocks of these species would need to be maintained by a hatchery. They spawn in free-flowing rivers and their eggs, which are very slightly negatively buoyant, are carried by river currents until hatching. Hypophisation is required for breeding them in hatcheries. The bighead also has the same feeding habits as those of catla and hence there is direct competition for food between these two species.
2.4 HATCHERY RESOURCES
The WAPDA hatchery at Ghazi currently supplies fish for stocking in Tarbela reservoir. The demand for stocking Tarbela is 1.5 million fingerlings per year, but the annual production at Ghazi is 200,000 to 300,000 fingerlings of common carp, rohu and mrigal (morakhi). WAPDA is constructing a new hatchery at Haripur that will supply Tarbela, so production from the Ghazi hatchery could be available for Ghazi-Barotha.
Expansion of the Ghazi hatchery would be advisable because current production would allow stocking only 300 fingerlings/ha/yr. The hatchery has plans to build three earthen ponds that could double their capacity. There is also an additional 8 ha of land available for future development of hatchery and nursery ponds. A 28 1/s (1.0 cusec) tubewell has been installed. Production could also be increased by breeding mullah during the winter, common carp during spring, major carps and Chinese carps during the summer.
2.12 2.5 FISH LADDER AT THE BARRAGE Mahseer is the principal migratory fish in the vicinity of the Project. It occurs in the Indus river as far downstream as the vicinity of Kalabagh (Ref. 2.12 & 2.13) and migrates upstream for a considerable distance to spawn. Spawning areas for mahseer were reported by Mirza (Ref. 2.9) from the rivers Siran, Dor, Kabul, and Haro (Drawing 2.4) and the Soan river and its tributaries. However, spawning has not been reported from the Indus river between Tarbela dam and the confluence with the Kabul river. The migration of mahseer upstream of the confluence of the Indus and Kabul rivers has been stopped by Tarbela dam. Above Tarbela dam, mahseer are known to spawn in the Siran river, and mahseer are the second most abundant fish in the harvest from the Khalabat pocket of Tarbela reservoir. Fish ladders are built to allow fish to pass over some obstacle across a river (for example a weir, a dam or a waterfall) and thus provide access to spawning areas upstream or to migration routes downstream. Thus ladders are included in the design of weirs and dams where fish are known to migrate past the proposed site. A fish ladder normally consists of a series of pools, each with a relatively narrow gap of perhaps 0.5 m width in the downstream wall through which water flows into the next pool. The gap is narrow so that the total flow is limited, thus allowing fish to rest in each pool before attempting to pass through the next gap into the upstream pool. The height difference between is typically about 0.6 m, this being a reasonable height for a fish to jump and also helping to limit both the velocity through the gap and the total flow through the pools. For a dam say only 20 m high, the fish ladder will include over 30 pools, sometimes with one or two larger pools provided at intervals where fish can rest, sometimes for a day or two. It follows that negotiating a long fish ladder upstream is a taxing process which can take several days.
For a fish migrating upstream, the negotiation of a fish ladder can be complicated by the "invisibility" of the start of the ladder, because the small flow may be masked by large discharges from irrigation outlets, spillways or turbines. Similarly, fish either returning downstream after spawning or migrating downstream to spawn will tend to be attracted by flows at an intake and thus not find the ladder.
In some projects where the dam is high and a fish ladder would be too long and taxing for fish, sophisticated mechanical fish lifts have been provided, with mixed results. Unless fish have some compelling reason, such as spawning, for moving up through a fish ladder, they will seldom expend the energy to swim through one. No fish ladder has been built to expand feeding areas for a fish species, as opposed to maintaining access to a spawning area.
2.13 A fish ladder at the barrage would be warranted if migration routes to extensive areas of the Indus river or its tributaries were to be blocked by the Project. This will not occur because there is no way for a migrating fish to pass upstream of Tarbela dam, only 7 km upstream of the barrage. No special habitats exist in the barrage pond area that would attract fish to pass upstream from the Indus river. The routes for fish out of Tarbela are the turbines and tunnels 4 and 5, and via the spillways. Passage through the turbines will be difficult and hazardous. Water for the turbines and tunnels is drawn from low level which is not attractive to the important fish in the reservoir. The spillways discharge water from higher levels, but only during the flood season, during which the major part of the total flow into the barrage pond will be discharged through the barrage gates. Thus fish will not be trapped inside the barrage pond during this period.
In view of the above, no advantage can be envisioned for a fish ladder at the Ghazi barrage. The power complex at Barotha is located off the Indus river and therefore will pose no barrier for fish movement.
2.6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
2.6.1 Plan to Maximise Fishery Value During the construction period, flows in the Indus river downstream of Tarbela will follow roughly the same route as they do currently, except in the immediate vicinity of the barrage construction site. Diversion of river flow for the Project will commence with pond filling and channel testing, which are scheduled to begin in May 1999. The first unit will be commissioned in December 1999. Full Project operation will begin eight months later when the fifth unit will be commissioned. Active management of fisheries at the Ghazi-Barotha Project can begin when the barrage pond is filled. The Project should be stocked with fingerlings as soon as possible after that time.
The species best suited for fishery development in the barrage pond and the headponds include mullah, common carp, silver carp and bighead carp. WAPDA hatchery facilities currently can provide common carp and silver carp. Annual restocking will be necessary for silver carp and bighead carp, and may be necessary for common carp. Expansion of current hatchery facilities will be required, but expansions already planned may be adequate. The major carps catla, rohu and mrigal may also be tried for experimentation in the first instance. If these are successful, they should be stocked regularly.
2.14 In the five years remaining until filling of the barrage pond, WAPDA should:
- develop techniques to capture, hold and breed mullah (Schizothorax plagiostomus);
- institute a programme to license fishermen and allocate fishing rights, and
- institute a programme to monitor fish stocks so that the fishery can be properly managed.
2.6.2 Breeding of Mullah Interviews with fishermen and direct observation of spawning can be used to determine spawning habits of mullah, which can then be used to devise facilities to hatch the eggs in the hatchery. Collection of young mullah from the shallows of the Indus river and examination of gut contents will serve as a guide for management of rearing ponds to provide food for fry and fingerlings. Because summer temperatures in the hatchery may be too warm for holding brood stock, eggs and milt may need to be collected from fishermen's catches, or brood stock may need to be replenished annually. Running-ripe females were collected in February 1994 during the survey of fishermen for this study.
2.6.3 Monitoring Development of the Fishery Judging the effectiveness of the Ghazi-Barotha fisheries programme will require the establishment of a data base on the fishery. Test netting should be employed during the period between stocking the ponds and opening the fishery. Tarbela Reservoir, the direct source of water for the Project, is not very productive. Thus two years may be required before stocked fish attain harvestable size. After the fishery is opened, nightly catches of fishermen should be randomly selected and sampled for the species, number and weight of fish caught. Trends in these measurements over time should guide stocking and harvest. Some of the fish caught may be tagged and released back in the barrage pond to evaluate survival, transfer down the channel and growth rates.
2.6.4 Production Targets and Levels of Investment
There is no generally accepted technique for prediction of fish production from rivers or reservoirs with short residence times, such as the Ghazi barrage pond. The limited data from this study provide order-of-magnitude guidance on fish production in the Project area and appropriate budgets for fisheries support. The median nightly catch of 17 fishermen from the survey for this study was 10 kg. They apparently fish almost nightly during the season and most fishing occurs during October through February.
2.15 Thus, a rough estimate of annual harvest might be: 20 fishermen x 10 kg fish/fishermen/night x 150 nights/year
= 30,000 kg fish/year This amount of mullah would have a retail market value of Rs. 600,000 to Rs. 810,000. In addition, 10,000 kg fish/year (worth Rs. 200,000 to 270,000) might be caught during other months by the fishermen and the anglers. Fishery management to maintain this level of fish production is, by necessity, still experimental. However, fish species have been selected to maximise production from the barrage pond and headponds. Fish production from the Project ponds should be greater per unit area than that realised from Tarbela because a greater portion of the bottom area will be exposed to sunlight, and all of the bottom area will be shallow enough to allow efficient fishing.
The total area for fish culture in the above ponds has been calculated after keeping in view the maximum drawdown and subtracting the shallow marginal areas which are not suitable for fish. In this way about 900 ha in the barrage pond, 316 ha in the north headpond and 70 ha in the south headpond become available for fish culture. The introduction of various species of fish in ponds depends upon the environmental conditions and the availability of food. For the Project, due to low water temperatures and scarcity of nutrients in the water, the food will be the main limiting factor. Keeping the above in view, only 300 fingerlings/ha/yr of the major carps, Chinese carps and the common carp are recommended.
Grass carp (Ctenopharyngodon idella) will not be suitable as there is little chance of the development of rooted vegetation, which is the main food for this species. Silver carp, big head carp and catla feed on plankton and get their food from the surface layers and water column, so they will compete for food. It will be possible to see which species is the most suitable after some years of their introduction.
Rohu is mainly a column feeder but occasionally it may feed upon the decaying vegetation at the bottom. Mrigal is predominantly a bottom feeder, feeding mainly on the decaying vegetation, but sometimes it gets food from the water column. The common carp is a bottom omnivore but may also get food from the water column.
Keeping these points in view the following species are recommended for stocking:
2.16 NUMBER OF FINGERLINGS ?OR STOCKING IN GBHP PROJECT PONDS PER ANNUM
SPECIES OF % BARRAGE NORTH SOUTH TOTAL FISH AGE POND HEADPOND HEADPOND (900 ha) (316 ha) (70 ha)
Silver carp 10% 27000 9480 2100 38580 Bighead carp 10% 27000 9480 2100 38580 Catla 10% 27000 9480 2100 38580 Rohu 30% 81000 28440 6300 115740 Mrigal 20% 54000 18960 4200 77160 Common carp 20% 54000 18960 4200 77160
Total 100% 270000 94800 21000 385800
In addition, mullah (Schizothorax plaQiostomus) will be found naturally in the barrage pond. It may continue to breed along the banks of the pond, as the water will be constantly flowing in the pond. Following the construction of the barrage near Ghazi, the present population of this species in the barrage pond area might get established. After a few years, when there is the deposition of silt on the bed, the breeding of this species in the pond might be interrupted and the stocking of this species would also become necessary. Fingerlings about five months old, of 15-20 cm length, are preferred for stocking, and the stocking rate may be as much as 2,250/ha (Ref. 2.14). Keeping in view the environmental conditions, the total number of fingerlings proposed for stocking in the Project ponds, at the rate of 300 fingerlings/ha, would be 385,800. By test netting it will be possible to judge which of the introduced species would be more suitable for the barrage pond and the headponds. On the basis of the statistics given in the above table, it is hoped that at least 200,000 kg of fish would be harvested annually, which is about 120 kg/ha. The average production in large shallow lakes is reported to be about 60 kg/ha, whereas a production of up to 750 kg/ha has been reported from smaller reservoirs (Ref. 2.14). If this fish is sold at the rate of Rs. 30/kg, it will fetch about Rs. 6 million per annum, which is about six times the present income. The above income has been estimated on the basis of the fish stocked in the Project ponds. To achieve this target it will be advisable that commercial fishing should not be allowed for two years after the first stocking of the fingerlings. In addition, there would be some income from the catching of mullah and other fish, and from collection of license fee from the anglers. The income from license charges from the fishermen and the anglers would be enough to establish new fish hatcheries and nursery ponds and also for the recruitment of additional fishery staff.
2.17 After the barrage is closed and a minimum flow of 28 cumecs is discharged from the Ghazi barrage, the Indus river between Ghazi and the Kabul river will be shallower and will probably be warmer during spring and autumn. Any deep pools scoured by high flows will become more pond-like and are likely to become more productive. Spotted snakehead (Channa punctata) occurs in the Project area during summer, and may become more important after the Project becomes operational. It is a desirable food fish that grows rapidly to as much as 31 cm in length. It breeds in ponds almost throughout the year by building a nest in marginal weeds. It is found in muddy streams up to an altitude of 600 m (Ref. 2.4). If further enhancement of fish production is desirable, artificial pools for fish production could be created by dredging of the Indus river channel. After much of the barrage pond is silted in, fish production areas could also be created by dredging silt into dikes (bunds), suitably protected against scour, to create fish ponds in the heavily silted areas. Small submersible dikes could be constructed within the drawdown zone of the barrage pool or the headponds to create permanent areas of 0.25-0.50 ha of optimum depth (1-2 m) for aquatic plants.
To help prevent damage to nets, the trees growing in some areas of the barrage pond and the headponds should be removed before inundation.
2.6.5 Allocation of Fishing Rights Provision should be made for continuation of activity and income for those persons currently involved in fishing. Making this provision is complicated by the fact that most fishermen are currently unlicensed, and those who are not currently involved in fishing might make a claim to participate in the fishery after the Project begins operation. Adequate documentation of participation in fisheries could be achieved by posting notices with the fish retailers in Ghazi, Topi and Zaida to the effect that only those who held fishing licenses during the two years prior to Project operation would be allowed to fish in the barrage pond and the headponds. The requirement of two years of licensing would serve to prevent overfishing from new fishermen eager to exploit new waters. Enforcement actions could also be used to encourage compliance. For example, a fisherman caught fishing without a license could have his net confiscated, but could retrieve it after purchasing a license and paying a small fine. The problem of fishing rights needs serious consideration. The usual practice with WAPDA Fisheries is that the fishing rights are sold to the fish contractors by open auction. This method is not recommended. The fishing rights should be allotted to the local fishermen who have been affected by the Project.
2.18 The fishing rights of the barrage pond should be restricted to the commercial fishermen belonging to Isa, Hasanpur, Abu-Bakr, Haroon and Ghurgushti on the left bank and those belonging to Galla, Zarobai, Batakara and Hund on the right bank. The fishing rights of the headponds should be given to the people belonging to Barotha, Beka Dheri, etc., who have been directly affected by the construction of the power complex. The method of issuing licenses and fixing the quota for each commercial fisherman is a complicated problem. Most of the fishermen are poor and cannot purchase the fishing equipment necessary for fishing in the Project ponds, whereas the conventional methods of fishing now in vogue in the river Indus would not be suitable. For this purpose, a Fishermen's Cooperative Society should be constituted under the guidance of WAPDA Fisheries and the Project NGO, who should arrange for their training and financial assistance.
During the period between the filling of the Project ponds and opening of the commercial fisheries (at least two years) the affected commercial fishermen should be compensated or provided with suitable employment so that they do not suffer financial hardship.
For the anglers, the usual method of issuing of licenses by WAPDA Fisheries would be appropriate.
REFERENCES
2.1 Mirza, M. R. 1973. Aquatic fauna of Swat Valley, Pakistan, Part I, Fish of Swat and adjoining areas. Biologia (Pakistan) 19(1 & 2):119-144.
2.2 Ali, S. R., M. Ahmad, M. R. Mirza, M. A. S. Ansari and N. Akhtar, 1980. Hydrobiological studies of the Indus river above and below the Tarbela Dam. Pakistan Journal of Scientific Studies 2 (1 & 2):15-31.
2.3 Narayan, P., 1992. Present status of coldwater fisheries in Kumaon Himalaya. In: Recent Researches in Coldwater Fisheries (1992): 5-9(Ed. K.L. Sehgal). 2.4 Talwar, P. K. and A. G. Jhingran, 1991. Inland Fish of India and Adjacent Countries. oxford & IBH Publishing Co., New Dehli. Two volumes. 2.5 Ali, S. R., 1968. Bottom fauna of the streams and rivers of Hazara District after summer rains. Pakistan Journal of Scientific and Industrial Research 11(2):208- 211.
2.6 Hora, S. L., 1934. Fish of Chitral. Records of the Indian Museum 36:279-320 as cited in Ref. 2.1.
2.19 2.7 Butt, J. A., 1986. Fish and Fisheries of North West Frontier Province (N.W.F.P.) Pakistan. Biologia (Pakistan) Vol. 32 Special Supplement: 21-33. 2.8 Butt, J. A. and M. Hayat, 1978. Breeding seasons in freshwater fish of North West Frontier Province, Pakistan. Bulletin of Hydrobiological Research 1:20 & 21:479-486.
2.9 Mirza, M. R., 1976. Fish and fisheries of the northern montane and submontane regions of Pakistan. Biologia (Pakistan) 22:107-120.
2.10 Butt, J. A. and K. Khan, 1987. Food of freshwater fish of North West Frontier Province, Pakistan. Proceedings of the 7th Pakistan Congress of Zoology: 217-233.
2.11 Nazneen, S. and G. A. Bari, 1982. Gut contents of Haleji Lake fish for the determination of the importance of phytoplankton as fish food. Pakistan Journal of Agricultural Research 3(3):156-169. 2.12 Khan, Hamid, 1946. A fishery survey of River Indus. Journal of the Bombay Natural History Society 46(3):529- 535.
2.13 Mirza, M. R., and M. A. Jan, 1993. Fish fauna of Kalabagh, Pakistan. Biologia (Pakistan) 38(1):17-22.
2.14 Pillay, T.V.R.,1990. Aquaculture: Principles and practices. Fishing News Books.
2.20 TABLE 2.1
FISH OF THE INDUS RIVER FROM TARBELA TO KABUL CONFLUENCE
SCIENTIFIC NAMES COMMON NAMES
ORDER OSTEOGLOSSIFORMES
FAMILY NOTOPTERIDAE
1. Notopterus notopterus (Pallas) Patra, Patri, Pari
ORDER SALMONIFORMES
FAMILY SALMONIDAE
2. Salmo trutta fario Linnaeus Brown Trout
ORDER CYPRINIFORMES
FAMILY CYPRINIDAE
3. AmblypharynQodon mola (Hamilton) Makni
4. Aspidoparia morar (Hamilton) Chilwa
5. Barilius pakistanious Mirza & Sadiq Pakistani chilwa
6. Barilius vagra (Hamilton) Lahori chilwa
*7. Cirrhinus mrigala (Hamilton) Mrigal, Mori, Morakhi
8. Crossocheilus diplocheilus (Heckel) Reti
*9. Cyprinus carpio Linnaeus Chaina, Gulfam, Common carp
10. Danio devario (Hamilton) Patha, Makhni
11. Garra cotyla (Gray) Patherchat, Nai
12. Hypophthalmichthys molitrix Silver carp (Valenciennes)
13. Labeo dero (Hamilton) Chhali
*14. Labeo rohita (Hamilton) Rohu
15. Racoma labiata McClelland Shoondal
16. Salmostoma bacaila (Hamilton) Chal
17. Salmostoma Runiabensis (Day) Punjabi chal
2.21 TABLE 2.1 (Cont'd)
18. Schizopyge esocinus (Heckel) Ranth
19. Schizothorax placiostomus Heckel Mullah, Keerni, Gulguli
20. Tor putitora (Hamilton) Mahseer
FAMILY COBITIDAE
21. Botia birdi Chaudhuri Soondal, Botia
FAMILY NEMACHEILIDAE
22. Acanthocobitis botia (Hamilton) Soondli
23. Nemacheilus corica (Hamilton) Soondli
24. Triplophysa gracilis (Day) Singhat
25. Triplophysa Yasinensis (Alcock) Singhat
FAMILY BAGRIDAE
26. Mystus bleekeri (Day) Bleekeri teengara
FAMILY SILURIDAE
27. Ompok pabda (Hamilton) Pafta
FAMILY SCHILBEIDAE
28. Clupisoma naziri Mirza & Awan Sheer Mahi
FAMILY SISORIDAE
29. Gagata cenia (Hamilton) Gagata
30. Glyptothorax punjabensis Sulemani Mirza & Kashmiri
31. Glyptothorax stocki Mirza & Nijssen Sulemani
FAMILY AMBLYCIPITIDAE
32. Amblyceps mangois (Hamilton) Sanglai
FAMILY HETEROPNEUSTIDAE
33. Heteropneustes fossilis (Bloch) Singhi
2.22 TABLE 2.1 (Cont'd)
ORDER BELONIFORMES FAMILY BELONIDAE
34. Xenentodon cancila (Hamilton) Kan
ORDER CHANNIFORMES
FAMILY CHANNIDAE
35. Channa punctata (Bloch) Daula
36. Channa qachua (Hamilton) Dauli
ORDER PERCIFORMES
FAMILY BELONTIIDAE
37. Colisa fasciata (Bloch) Bari kanghi
FAMILY CICHLIDAE
*38. Oreochromis mossambicus (Peters) Tilapia
ORDER MASTACEMBELIFORMES
FAMILY MASTACEMBELIDAE
39. Mastacembelus armatus (Lacepede) Mamahi, Bam
Notes: 1. Species marked with an asterisk(*) have been introduced in Tarbela Reservoir and come down to Ghazi on the opening of the spillways.
2. Species No. 2 and 18 are usually found in the upper parts of the Indus river but sometimes enter Tarbela Reservoir and rarely come down to Ghazi on the opening of the spillways.
3. Species No. 1, 2, 7, 9, 12, 13, 14, 15, 18, 19, 20, 27, 28, 30, 33, 35, 36 and 38 are food fish.
2.23 TABLE 2.2
FEEDING AND SPAWNING HABITS OF FISH IMPORTANT TO FISHERIES DEVELOPMENT AT THE GHAZI-BAROTHA PROJECT
Feeding Food Spawning Species Location Type Location
Cyprinus carpio Column omnivore vegetation & bottom
Catla catla Surface zooplankton flooded shallows & column
Cirrhinus mrigala Column & detritus flooded shallows bottom
Ctenopharyngodon shallow herbi- free-flowing idella water omnivore rivers
Labeo rohita Water herbi- flooded shallows column omnivore & bottom
Tor putitora Water omnivore pebbles on stream column margins
HvYophtha1michthys surface & phytoplankton free-flowing molitrix column rivers
Aristichthys nobilis surface & zooplankton free-flowing water rivers column
Schizothorax bottom periphyton gravel along plagiostomus benthos stream banks
2.24 ANNEX 1
FISHERIES SURVEY INTERVIEW FORM
GHAZI-BAROTHA HYDROPOWER PROJECT
FISHERIES SURVEY
I. General
1. Name of the fisherman 2. Village 3. Household size - Adult Children Male Female Male Female_
4. Family system Joint Family_ Nuclear family_
5. Family occupation (No) Adult Children Male Female Male Female A. Fishing _ B. Agriculture C. Business _ D. Service E. Others
6. Fishing activity (tick which is applicable)
O Independent fishing O Joint family fishing O Group fishing O Fishing for a Contractor
II. 1. Species of fish found in the area.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
2. Which part of the year these species are available?
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
3. What is the breeding season of the fish?
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
2.25 Name of fish 1. Schizothorax plagiostomus-Mullah 2. Racoma labiata - Shoondal or Chun 3. Labeo dero - Torki or Chhali 4. Tor putitora - Mahseer 5. Cyprinus carpio - Chaina 6. Hypoph. molitrix - Silver carp 7. Clupisoma naziri - Sheer mahi 8. Notopterus sp. - Patra 9. Cirrhinus mrigala - Mori, Mrigal Fishing gears . A. Nets , B. Rod and Line
4. What fishing gear you find the best?
1. A,B 2. A,B 3. A,B
5. Size and weight of fish?
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6. What days are best for fishing?
In a week_ In a month_ In a year_
7. Do you fish daily? Yes/No
8. If no on what days?
In a week_ In a month_ In a year_
9. How many hours are spent on fishing in one day?
10. At what time does fishing start?
11. What type of water is best for fish/fishing?
1. 2. 3.
12. Where/when do the fish feed?
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
2.26 13. How much fish do you catch? kg
1. In one day 2. In one week_ 3. In one month_ III.Marketing 1. In which market do you sell your fish?_
2. How often do you go to the market?
A. Daily_ _ B. Bi-weekly - C. Weekly_ 3. How far is the market from the fishing spot? 4. The average transportation cost from the fishing spot to the market_ 5. What is the usual price of fish (per kg)?
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 8. 9. 6. What days/months of the year your fish sell the best?_ IV. 1. If some of your family members are busy in agriculture, how much land/occupancy tenant each member/all the family has barani irrigated_ _
Ml M2 M3 Family_ 2. If working as a sharecropper tenant how much land each member/family has?
barani irrigated_
Ml M2 M3 Family
3. How much income each member/family is making annually from agriculture? Rs. Ml M2__ M3 Family_ V. 1. If some members of your family are in service what type of service they are busy in:
Ml M2 M3 Family_
Govt.______Private_
2.27 2. How many hours per day they have to be on the job? Ml M2__ M3 Family_
3. How much money they are making per person per month?
Ml Rs. M2 Rs. M3 Rs. Family Rs.
VI. 1. If some members/family is doing some business what type of business?
Ml M2 M3 Family_ 2. How much each member/family is earning per month?_ Ml Rs. M2 Rs. M3 Rs. Family Rs.
VII.l. Any other occupation the family members have?
Ml M2 M3 Family_ 2. How much money per month per person/family earn?
Ml Rs._ M2 Rs. M3 Rs. Family Rs.
Note: M = Member of the family
2.28 CHAPTER 3
ASSESSMENT OF RISK OF EUTROPHICATION IN GXAZI BARRAGE POND
3.1 INTRODUCTION The Ghazi barrage pond will be located on the Indus river just upstream of the town of Ghazi, about 7 km downstream of Tarbela dam. Its purpose will be to reregulate the daily flows from Tarbela and to divert a constant flow each day into the power channel. The barrage pond will have a normal retention level of 340.0 m, a syrface area of about 1,140 ha, and a total volume of about 70 M m . Drawing 2.1, taken from the Project Feasibility Report, shows the area/volume relationships for the pond.
Tarbela is operated primarily to provide water for irrigation. Table 3.1 shows an example of the releases for each nominal 10 day period over an average hydrological year. The flow varies from about 7,500 cumecs in August to about 400 cumecs in January, when the canal system is being maintained and irrigation releases are minimal. During the low-flow season, the discharge of the required irrigation water can be concentrated into the period of peak demand for electricity, resulting in four-hour discharges in the range 3,450 cumecs (reservoir full) to 2,300 cumecs (minimum reservoir elevation, in May). This results in a wide range of flows during each day. The barrage pond will receive wastewater (sewage, either treated or untreated) from sewerage systems provided for the Tarbela colonies on the right and left banks. In addition, surface runoff during rain will carry detritus into the pond, while fine sediment carried through Tarbela reservoir will carry some nutrients. Some of these nutrients (eg ammonia) will react with oxygen in the water in order to become chemically stable, and with others (eg phosphates) and sunlight will promote the growth of phytoplankton in the pond. Prominent among them are diatoms and filamentitous blue-green algae.
Under stable conditions, phytoplankton are grazed and their numbers controlled by zooplankton, and both types of plankton are grazed by fish. In the event of favourable combinations of temperature, light and nutrients, algal growth can be very rapid, leading to 'blooms'. The overall effect is a deterioration of water quality, with reductions in dissolved oxygen (DO), increase in turbidity, odour and toxins released by algae. If the DO concentration reduces to low levels, fish and other aquatic life will die. This report presents the results of a brief study of the risk of excessive nutrients (eutrophication) developing in the barrage pond.
3.1 3.2 QUALITY OF WATER DISCHARGED FROM TARBELA Table 3.2 summarises the results of analyses of samples of water from the river and from wastewater discharges in barrage pond area during January 1994, when Tarbela's discharges were near their minimum. Samples 1 and 2 were taken from the river immediately downstream of Tarbela, and from the turbine outlets. These show BOD5 values of 34 and 42 mg/l, while the dissolved oxygen content was 7.46 and 7.43 mg/l respectively. The BOD5 values are quite high, and reflect the fact that the water discharged from the turbines is taken from near the bottom of the reservoir. The samples were taken when the discharge from Tarbela would have been about 425 cumecs. This results in a total BOD5 load of about 1,500 t/day.
3.3 FLOW CHARACTERISTICS IN BARRAGE POND The total volume of the barrage pond is about 70 M cu m. This volume is expected to reduce slowly as a result of accumulation of fine sediment in areas of low velocity.
During the high flow season (May to October), the discharges from Tarbela will exceed the capacity of the power channel, so that the barrage pond will remain full. The retention times in the unsilted pond will be as follows: 2,000 cumecs (typical minimum flow in season) 9.5 hours 5,000 cumecs (typical 10-day maximum) 3.8 hours 9,000 cumecs (typical yearly maximum) 2.2 hours
This is also the hot season, but the flows into Tarbela result largely from snow-melt, so that the temperature of the released water is low. This is also the time when the water is relatively opaque due to suspended fine sediment, so that penetration of sunlight is limited.
During the low-flow season (November-April) the average daily flow will typically be in the range 425 to 1,200 cumecs, In addition, Tarbela's turbines are operated for peaking, so that the level in the barrage pond will fluctuate by up to about 3.5 m each day as a result of the reregulation of these peaking flows. At the drawn-down elevation of 336.50 m the pond will have a volume of about 35 M m . This reduction in average volume of the pond will result in retention times in the range 34 to 12 hours. During this winter period, the effects of the sun in providing warmth and light are reduced.
3.2 The retention times discussed above result in average velocities through the pond of between about 0.9 m/s and 0.06 M/s. These velocities are too high to allow stratification to develop. The plan shape of the pond is approximately rectangular, with no significant embayments where stagnant conditions could develop. In small embayments during the lowest-flow period, the large daily fluctuations in pond levels caused by peaking operations at Tarbela will ensure circulation of water.
3.4 SOURCES OF NUTRIENTS
There are no significant nullahs discharging into the barrage pond. Around the periphery of the pond are the Tarbela colonies, which are the only sources of domestic wastewater inflows to the barrage pond. On the left bank, Sobra Tarbela Colony and Sanober Tarbela Colony have sewage conveyance systems and sewage treatment plants. The locations of these treatment plants are shown on Drawing 3.1. The Right Bank Colony also has a sewage conveyance system and treatment plant. The Junior Officers' Bungalows and the River View Colony on the right bank each have a sewage conveyance system and septic tank for sewage treatment. All these sewage treatment plants/processes have been evaluated as to their effluent characteristics and plant efficiencies to establish the likely eutrophication effect on the barrage pond. The results of these assessments are presented in Appendix 3-A. The principal results are summarised on Table 3.3. These results show that the total BOD load contributed by the sewerage systems to the barrage pond at the time of minimum flows from Tarbela is about 620 kg/day (0.62 t/day), or only 0.05% of the total BOD5 load.
3.5 CONCLUSIONS
From this brief assessment, the following conclusions can be drawn:
The retention times in the barrage pond will range from as little as 12 hours to a maximum of about 34 hours. These times are relatively short. Average velocities in the barrage pond will range from 0.9 to 0.06 m/s, while the plan shape of the pond is rectangular, with no major embayments. These velocities are too high to allow stagnant conditions to develop.
The critical time is likely to be January, when discharges from Tarbela are at their lowest. During this period, the barrage water level will fluctuate by up to
3.3 3.5 m each day as a resuJt of peaking operations at Tarbela. This will help to ensure that stagnant conditions cannot occur in small embayments. The total BOD5 discharged by Tarbela during January is about 1,500 t/day. The contribution added by the sewage treatment plants around the perimeter of the pond at present is about 0.62 t/day. Thus the effect of this additional BOD5 will be insignificant. In the long term, the volume of the barrage pond will reduce as the result of sedimentation. This will increase average velocities through the pond and reduce retention times. The overall conclusion is that there is no risk of eutrophication developing in the barrage pond.
3.4 APPENDIX 3-A
SURVEY OF EXISTING SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANTS AT TARBELA
A.1. SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT AT THE LEFT BANK COLONY A.l.1 General The left bank sewage treatment plant (STP) caters for the Sanober Colony, Lower Sanober Colony, Mehran Colony, Main Colony and Telephone (T&T) Colony on the left bank. The population of these colonies is 9,000. The location of the STP is shown on Drawing 3.1 and the treatment process flow diagram is shown on Drawing 3.2. As a layout plan of the STP or a completion plan were not available, the various components of the existing plant have been scaled and the layout plan reproduced as shown on Drawing 3.3.
A.1.2 Design Parameters of the (STP) Left Bank The design parameters of the plant are as follows:
-Max. inflow rate 13,800 m3/d Minimum inflow rate 11,350 m3/d Influent BOD 150 mg/l Effluent BOD 20 mg/l
A.1.3 Type of Process and Plant Installations The process design of the plant is based on a modified activated sludge process. The process consists of extended aeration in a circular tank fitted with a submerged turbine mixer and aerated with compressed air. A circular trough collects the effluent from' the aeration tank and the effluent is discharged into the Indus river. The sludge is collected in the sludge chamber and pumped into the sludge drying beds. A brief description of the major components of the plant is given below.
Bar Screen
The inflow is received at the bar screen through the sewer pipe by gravity flow. The bar screens are in good condition. Grit Chamber A semi-circular grit chamber receives the wastewater through the screen. Inorganic particles and grit that pass through the bar screen settle down in this chamber. A sand catcher is installed in the grit chamber that ejects the sand from the chamber and deposits it into a sand pit. The sand catcher device is not
3.5 working presently and as a result the grit chamber is filled with sand. However, the wastewater is passing to the aeration tank through the remaining 1.2 m depth of the grit chamber. The WAPDA staff at the plant stated that the sand catcher has been removed and is under repair.
Aeration Tank (Biolator) The aeration tank consists of a 19.5 m diameter circular tank fitted with submerged type of turbine aerator. The compressed air to the tank is supplied by the compressor installed in the operation room. The turbine aerator and compressor were operated and found to be in good working condition. Sludge Collection Chamber
The settled sludge from the aeration tank is collected in a sludge chamber under the hydraulic pressure of the mixed liquor of the aerator. The sludge pumps installed inside the sludge chamber were found to be in good working order. Sludge Drying Beds The sludge drying beds consist of 6 beds having a total area of 30 m x 18 m. These beds are not being used due to low production of sludge. Flow Recording Instruments A flow recorder panel, containing a digital recorder and an integrated flow recorder instrument with a chart mounted on a drum, is installed in the control room to measure the wastewater inflows to the plant. However, the probes at the inflow flume are missing and the recording instruments are not working. Water Quality Testing Laboratory
A small testing laboratory is available within the plant to test the BOD and COD of the wastewater. The incubator is out of order and so no tests are being carried out.
A.1.4 Efficiency of the Left Bank Plant The sewage treatment plant was operated and wastewater inflow and effluent samples were collected. Biological and chemical analyses of the samples were performed. The results of the analysis are given in Table 3.2. The BOD of the inflow was 72 mg/l and of the treated effluent was 10 mg/l. Sewage having a BOD of 72 mg/l is classified as weak strength sewage. The inflow sample collected had an opaque colour with little suspended matter showing low suspended organic content. The low density of the population and the abundant availability of water has resulted in dilution of the sewage.
3.6 The effluent disposal standard required by EPA Pakistan is 80 mg/l. The WHO standard for effluent disposal to surface streams is 20 mg/l. The treated effluent of this plant meets both these standards. It is classified as excellent quality effluent and thus will have no adverse effect on the overall quality of the water in the barrage pond.
A.2 SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT AT THE SOBRA CITY COLONY
A.2.1 General The sewage treatment plant for Sobra City Colony is located near Ghazi Check Post on the left bank. The location of the STP is shown on Drawing 3.1. This treatment plant receives the wastewater from the Sobra City Colony, Tarbela that has a population of about 5,000. The existing components of the plant were measured on site and the layout plan is shown on Drawing 3.4.
A.2.2 Design Parameters of STP Sobra City Colony
The design parameters of the STP were collected from WAPDA office Tarbela and are reproduced below: - Maximum inflow rate 10,900 m3/d - Minimum inflow rate 9,100 m3/d - Influent BOD 150 mg/l - Effluent BOD 20 mg/l
A.2.3 Type of Process and Plant Installations
The process design of the plant is based on the extended aeration, activated sludge system in a circular tank fitted with a submerged turbine mixer and aerated with compressed air. A circular trough collects the effluent from the aeration tank and the effluent is discharged to the Indus river. A brief description of the major components of the plant is given below. Wastewater Collection Well Wastewater inflow is collected in a well inside the treatment plant site. The wastewater is then pumped to the aeration tank. The submersible pumps installed in this well are in good order. Aeration Tank Aeration for biological treatment takes place in a 15 m diameter circular tank fitted with a submerged turbine aerator. Air is supplied through pipes at the level of the turbine by a
3.7 compressor. The treated effluent is collected in a trough. The effluent is carried through a pipeline to the Indus river. Sludge Digester The sludge digester consists of a 9 x 9 m rectangular tank. A submerged turbine aerator is also installed to provide air for digestion of the sludge. The sludge digester is build at a higher level than the aerator (Biolator) and in-line pumps are provided to pump sludge from the aerator to the sludge digester. Sludge Drying Beds Sludge drying beds with an area of 23 x 30 m are provided. The sludge drying beds were not being used due to low production of sludge. The inlet valves were operated and the water effluent from the sludge digester was found to be clean. This is due to the weak strength of wastewater inflow. The operational staff stated that sludge is taken out of the digester and aerator occasionally. Chlorination
A concrete tank is provided to supply sodium hypochloride solution to the treated effluent. This unit was not working and the practice of chlorinating the effluent has long been abandoned. Chlorination of treated effluent can lead to the production of chlorinated hydrocarbons which can be carcenogenic, and thus is no longer recommended.
A.2.4 Efficiency of the Sobra City Plant
The wastewater influent and treated effluent samples were collected on January 18, 1994 and biological and chemical analyses were performed. The BOD of the wastewater influent was 99 mg/l and of the treated effluent was 22 mg/l (Table 3.3). The treated effluent of the plant is within the EPA standard and very close to the WHO standard. It is concluded that the plant is working efficiently. The phosphorous content of the effluent is less than 1 mg/l. This treated effluent can be discharged directly into the barrage pond without any adverse effect on the overall quality of water in the pond.
A.3 SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT AT THE RIGHT BANK COLONY
3.1 General
The sewage treatment plant for the Right Bank Colony is located along the Tarbela Topi road. It caters for a total population of 9,000. The sewage from the Right Bank Colony (RBC) is received in a sump and pumped into the treatment plant. The location is shown on Drawing 3.1, and the layout plan is shown on Drawing 3.5. The wastewater from the other two colonies, namely Junior Officers
3.8 Bungalows and River View Colony-, is treated in a septic tank located near the river bank and the effluent is discharged into the Indus river.
A.3.2 Design Parameters of the STP at RBC The design parameters for the treatment works, provided by WAPDA Office Tarbela, are as under:
3 - Maximum inflow rate 1,360 m /d - Influent BOD 150 mg/l - Effluent BOD 25 mg/l
A.3.3 Type of Process and Plant Installations The process design of the plant is based on a modified activated sludge process. The treatment process comprises primary sedimentation, secondary sedimentation facilities and aeration system in a rectangular tank. Finally, the effluent is disposed off into the Indus through a sewer pipe. The primary and secondary sludge is collected in a sludge tank and pumped into the sludge collection ponds.
A brief description of the major components of the plant is given below.
Detritus Tank Wastewater is received in a collection well through the main sewer. This water is pumped to the detritus tank which is a concrete chamber 2.4 x 1.5 m in size and provided with horizontal screen bars to detain heavy suspended matter. From the detritus tank, water passes to the primary clarifier. The pumps installed in the collection well are in good working order.
Primary Clarifier
A circular primary clarifier 10 m in diameter and with a depth of 3 m is provided for separation of heavy organic and inorganic suspended particles. The clarifier is fitted with a scraper to collect the settled sediments at the bottom. The sludge thus accumulated is drawn off under gravity to a sludge tank. The scraper machinery is in working condition.
Aeration Tanks There are two tanks each of size 7 x 7 m. Both the tanks have an extended aeration system. Surface aerators have been provided in these tanks. The aerators are in good working condition.
3.9 Secondary Clarifier
The secondary clarifier has approximately the same dimensions as the primary clarifier, measuring 10 m in dia and 3 m in depth. The treated wastewater passes over the overflow weir and is finally disposed off into the Indus river through a sewer pipe. Secondary sludge produced is scraped and pumped into the sludge tank. The scraping facility is the same as that of the primary clarifier. Sludge Collection Ponds The sludge collected from the primary and secondary clarifiers is pumped into four sludge collection ponds, each of equal size. Siphons provided in the ponds are not working and decanted water is not carried to the sludge beds. Presently the decanted water is being pumped out. The siphon pipes require repair. Sludge Drying Beds There are six beds of equal size which are not in use due to the failure of the siphon system for carrying the decanted water to the beds. Chlorination Unit A chlorination room exists but the chlorination equipment has been removed. As discussed above in A.2.3, chlorination is no longer recommended.
A.3.4 Efficiency of the Right Bank Plant Influent and effluent samples of the plant were taken and analysed for chemical and biological characteristics (Table 3.2). The BOD of the influent and effluent was found to be 140 mg/l and 89 mg/l respectively. These results indicate the efficiency of the plant to be 36%. The quantity of wastewa er inflow to the plant was ascertained to be 1.2 cusecs (2,930 m /d) on 18 January 1994 by weir measurement. The plant is designed to take a maximum inflow rate of 1360 m3/d. The overloading is resulting in partial treatment of the wastewater. Additional treatment capacity is required to reduce the load on the plant.
A.3.5 Extension of Right bank Colony Plant A preliminary design and cost estimate have been prepared of the required extension for the Right Bank Colony sewage treatment plant. The design has been based on an additional capacity of 1,910 m3 /day average flow with a BOD load of 250 mg/I.
3.10 The extension will comprise the following principal elements:
- a bar screen, inlet channel and critical depth measuring flume;
- a grit chamber with a design velocity of 0.25 in/s at peak flow;
- an oxidation ditch with a depth of 3 m and an area of 500 m 2 , and two horizontal 'Mammoth' type aerators of 1 m diameter;
- a final settling tank 12 m in diameter, and
2 - sludge drying beds with an area of 840 m .
The estimated cost is shown on Table 3.4 and totals Rs 9 million.
A.4 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
A.4.1 Sewage Treatment Plant at the Left Bank Colony
The plant at the Left Bank Colony is working efficiently with an effluent BOD of 10 mg/l. This is well within the Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency discharge standard of 80 mg/l, and within the WHO discharge standard of 20 mg/l. This plant is satisfactory but the following minor repair works are required:
-- The grit chamber is filled with sediment and should be cleared. The sand ejector presently removed from the grit chamber should be repaired and reinstalled.
- The flow recorder for the inflow wastewater should be repaired and probes installed at the weir to record the inflow to the plant.
- The BOD testing laboratory should be updated and a new incubator should be provided.
A.4.2 Sewage Treatment Plant at the Sobra City Colony
The effluent BOD of this plant is 22 mg/l. This is very close to the WHO standard of 20 mg/l. The plant is rated as efficient. However, the aeration pipes to the aerator should be repaired.
A.4.3 Sewage Treatment Plant at the Right Bank Colony
The effluent BOD of this plant was measured as 89 mg/l. This exceeds the required standards due to overloadirLg of the plant. An additional treatment capacity of about 1,900 m /d is requiredl. The cost of the additional treatment works has been estimated to be about Rs. 9 million.
3.11 TABLE 3.1
TEN-DAY MEAN OUTFLOWS FROM TARBELA RESERVOIR 1976-90 (Flows inCumecs) YEAR 10 DAY OCT NOV DEC JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP PERIOD _ 1976 - 77 1 1453 1669 934 128 651 1906 963 941 2931 3530 6700 3588 II 1049 1264 850 1028 1540 1800 1029 988 2651 5528 5125 2506 III 1486 1196 850 758 t955 t327 1429 2053 3732 6348 4804 2468 1977 - 78 1 2862 1085 562 596 1334 1434 812 2224 4384 4392 8609 3131 11 2898 1538 640 546 1408 801 1145 2453 4296 7272 7918 3224 III 1261 1347 575 803 1500 477 1762 3257 4316 8436 6117 1849 1978 - 79 1 2453 1204 795 473 1556 780 1561 2155 1654 4064 6519 3345 It 2309 805 787 463 1394 634 1965 2354 3625 3472 5106 3492 1515 842 439 544 977 2036 1942 1470 4415 6196 4370 3449 1979 - 80 1 2387 1143 1247 643 630 1341 657 1418 3399 2794 6867 3634 it 1712 1319 1214 639 1006 1110 675 1855 4294 3044 3129 3591 III 1575 1152 945 634 1163 1017 1047 2749 4503 6166 3695 3538 1980 - 81 1 2892 897 1198 624 643 1191 418 3094 3644 4338 5550 3279 II 1874 1220 1247 1151 873 1199 445 4047 2525 3630 6425 3526 III 1221 1286 815 677 1195 427 2249 4140 4333 3565 4279 2976 1981 - 82 1 2786 1019 115S 667 989 988 675 t557 3237 3573 1529 2490 It 1521 951 1084 662 1337 518 803 1093 2777 3673 7159 3449 III 1326 1212 693 653 1259 819 1065 2278 3851 1969 4021 4290 1982 - 83 1 3090 1170 1221 667 499 703 557 594 3581 4231 8260 6525 II 1859 996 897 639 1075 1028 549 1829 3228 3486 5893 4129 lII 1360 955 473 512 1203 610 541 1577 3965 2104 7406 1822 1983 - 84 1 1978 1061 1699 764 876 1802 842 1480 2079 4437 6607 5470 II 1566 1280 1380 618 1367 1809 1125 1828 3849 4494 7824 2350 III 1115 1831 878 734 1434 896 1549 2240 4344 5522 8045 1779 1984 - 85 1 2315 1633 1407 531 1053 1469 699 1172 2857 4132 5882 4180 II 1528 1432 1041 989 1738 946 614 1172 3469 3039 5106 2775 III 1385 1401 563 991 1473 731 1082 1994 3625 1900 5457 4035 1985 - 86 1 3095 1280 1277 439 946 872 693 1292 2759 3468 8380 3358 II 1560 1263 702 487 1127 821 824 2094 3108 5790 5789 3430 III 1481 1821 510 801 776 535 697 2912 2756 7347 4696 3476 1986 - 87 1 2932 1375 887 244 1697 706 1562 1585 2892 3937 4578 5626 II 1461 1404 896 603 1455 569 1663 1263 996 3552 4790 3188 III 1289 1421 517 772 1238 746 2112 1742 3552 4751 6852 3648 1987 - 88 1 3949 1557 1477 888 1328 1102 724 2263 3983 6609 6409 3502 II 2018 1401 818 769 1794 453 987 2382 4396 9522 6788 3471 III 1561 1524 488 751 948 635 1260 3250 3795 8601 5704 2174 1988 - 89 1 1437 1557 1382 619 926 1520 1023 1555 1859 4418 6089 2627 11 1125 1524 1173 747 1428 1562 1307 1860 2559 3530 4140 3118 III 1061 1761 690 939 1207 1398 1533 2482 3921 5606 4995 3216 1989 - 90 1 3108 1625 1567 494 776 490 453 810 4528 8985 7875 4879 II 2160 1642 1452 385 1243 816 467 1187 4381 6771 6142 3622 III 1307 1763 673 508 977 411 575 3942 8416 5567 5683 2956 MIN I 1437 897 562 128 499 490 418 594 4654 2794 1529 2490 11 1049 805 640 385 873 453 445 988 996 3039 3129 2350 III 1061 842 439 S08 776 411 541 1470 2756 1900 3695 1779 AVERAGE I 2624 1305 1201 555 993 1165 831 1581 3128 4493 6561 3974 II 1746 1289 1013 695 1342 1005 971 1886 3297 4772 5809 3276 III 1353 1394 651 720 1236 862 1346 2577 4252 5306 5437 2977 MAX I 3949 1669 1699 888 1697 1906 1562 3094 4528 8985 8609 6525 II 2698 1642 1452 1151 1794 1809 1965 4047 4396 9522 7918 4129 III 1575 1831 945 991 1955 2036 2249 4140 8416 8601 8045 4290
3.12, TABLE 3.2
WASTEWATER ANALYSIS IN BARRAGE POND AREA
SR. SAMPLE TEMP pH T.D.S E.C HARDNESS CALCtUM MAGNESIUM SULPHATE CHLORIDE PHOSPHOROUS PHOSPHATE AMONIA 8.0.0 0.0 C.O.D NO. (C) m gl us/m mgfl m m mgI mg/i mg7g/l g. mgt mg/ t - mg Tailrace
1. River 21.0 7.21 204 285 155 61 44 58 1.7 <1 <1 0.48 34 7.46 60 2. Turbine 21.2 7.25 198 275 145 58 42 56 1.0 <1 <1 0.20 42 7.23 56 Sanobar Trealment Plant
3. 2 -A influent 20.9 6.78 250 375 240 96 69 56 5.0 <1 <1 1.95 72 2.3 100 4. 2-B ffluent 21.3 7.08 263 389 280 112 82 48 4.0 <1 <1 1.60 10 5.9 16 Sobra Treatment Plant
5. 3-A intluent 21.2 7.21 336 453 320 128 93 54 2.5 <1 C1 N.0 99 2.4 140 HX 6. 3-8 effluent 21.2 6.80 267 400 320 128 93 54 3.0 <1 <1 2.07 22 6.1 32 Right Bank Colony TreatmentPlant
7. 4-A intluent 21.0 6.93 425 638 320 128 92 116 8.5 <1 <1 1.34 140 5.71 264 8. 4-Beffluent 21.1 6.84 418 625 315 126 91 50 5.5 <1 c1 1.26 89 5.83 192 Junior Officer Banglows Right Bank
9. 8-A 20.9 6.71 389 676 310, 126 89 40, 2.5 <1 c1 1.65 72 1.0 100 Junior Officer Banglows after septic tank
10. 8-C 21.3 7.31 209 495 160 64 46 60 1.0| <1 <1 0.66 46 2.2 64 River View Colony
11. 8-B 21.1 6.91 395 5961 3251 1301 94 451 2.54 <1 <1 1.751 791 2.3 120 TABLE 3.3
EXISTING TOTAL BOD LOAD OF SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANTS
Sr. Descriptionof Flow (m31day) BODS(mg/I) Total Load No. TreatmentPlant (kg/day)
1. Left Bank Colony 13779 10 138
2. Sobra City 10896 22 240
3. Right Bank Colony 2724 89 242
Total: 620
TOTAL BOD LOAD AFTER IMPROVEMENT
Sr. Descriptionof Flow (m3/day) BOD5(mg/I) Total Load No. TreatmentPlant (kg/day)
1. Left Bank Colony 13779 10 138
2. Sobra City 10896 22 240
3. Right Bank Colony 3269 25 80
Total: 460
3.14 TABLE 3.4
COST ESTIMATE FOR EXPANSION OF SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT AT RIGHT BANK COLONY-TARBELA
SR. ITEM UNIT QUANTITY RATE AMOUNT NO. (Rs) (Rs) SEWAGE PUMPING STATION 1. Construction of pump house including excavation P.C.C, R.C.Cand pipe work Item L/S 150,000 2. Pumps for wastewater pumping station: 2,800 m3/day at 10m head 5 kW motors: 2 pumps, 1 duty, 1 standby No 2 75,000 150,000 3. Supply of power to pumping station and electrical installation Item L/S 50,000 BAR SCREEN AND GRIT CHAMBER 4. Concrete structure and flow measurement Item L/S 20,000 5. Bar screen, galvanised M.S manually raked No 1 20,000 20,000 OXIDATION DITCH 6. Excavation m3 4000 40 160,000 7. Plain and reinforced concrete including formwork m3 550 1,800 990,000 8. Mild steel reinforcement tonne 65 18,000 1,170,000 9. Miscellaneousitems Item L/S 350,000 10. Supply of 2 number Mammoth rotors 5.5m long 1.Omdia including gear box, motor I complete in all respects Item 2 1,250,000 2,500,000 CLARIFIER 11. Clarifier of size 12.Omdia. built of reinforced concrete Item L/S 700,000 12. Sludge scraper for clarifier, 12.Omdia. rotating bridge type with motor and gearboxes complete in all respects Item L/S 1,200,000 SLUDGE DRYING BEDS 13. Open drying beds 20m x 42m filled with fine sand, coarse gravel including under- drainage system Item L/S 750,000 SUB-TOTAL 8,210,000 Contingencies (10%) say 800,000 TOTAL 9,010,000
3.15 iI
CHAPTER 4
TOWN PLANNING FOR GHAZI AND KHALO CHIAPTER 3
ASSESSMENT OF RISK OF EUTROPHICATION IN GHAZI BARRAGE POND CHAPTER 4 TOWN PLANNING FOR GHAZI & KHALO
4.1 INTRODUCTION 4.1.1 Background The Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project consists of three major components: a barrage, a power channel and a power complex. The barrage will be located on the Indus river about 7 km downstream of Tarbela dam, just upstream of the town of Ghazi. It will divert up to 1,600 cumecs of water into a power channel which will carry the water to the power complex near Barotha village. The power channel has been aligned to pass close to the south side of Ghazi and Khalo towns. Both Ghazi and Khalo developed largely during the construction phase of Tarbela dam from 1969-1974. During this period, both skilled and unskilled labour migrated to these villages (Ghazi has recently been graded Tehsil status and is now classified as a town). Apart from this migration, a part of the population from the villages which were inundated by the Tarbela reservoir were relocated in a nearby resettlement village, Ghazi Hamlet, and a part settled within the villages of Ghazi and Khalo. After the completion of Tarbela dam, the exodus of population from these villages brought the economic activity to a more normal level. The construction of the barrage and adjacent reach of the power channel will have three main effects, both positive and negative, on Ghazi and Khalo: there will be another boom during the construction period, with a temporary influx of workers; the road bridge on the barrage will provide an important crossing of the Indus river, and
- the proximity of the power channel will limit the long- term expansion of Ghazi and Khalo.
4.1.2 Purpose of Present Study
As part of the mitigation measures proposed for the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project, the Environmental Review Panel identified the need for a study to evaluate the requirements for town planning for Ghazi and Khalo in order to offset the negative effects of the Project. This report summarises the work done on a preliminary study of:
the main deficiencies and civic problems, and measures to rectify these through short-term and long-term development programmes, and
4.1 - the preparation of terms of reference and a budget cost estimate for a full town planing study.
4.1.3 Study Methodology In accordance with the requirements of the study, the consultants mobilized a team of experts, comprising professionals in the fields of town planning and engineering, which carried out extensive reconnaissance visits to Ghazi and Khalo and also held discussions with the government and semi-government officials to ascertain the present shortcomings in the towns and the measures required for these to be rectified. The study is aimed at suggesting short-term measures to alleviate urgent civic problems as well as preparing a portfolio of projects to cater to future civic functions and facilities on a long-term basis. The short-term measures, when implemented, will create a positive impact on the area and demonstrate a concern on the part of the government to uplift the living conditions in these towns. However, elaborate work will have to be conducted by the concerned government departments, including a topographic survey of the towns, the assembling of published and unpublished data, and finally the preparing of a preliminary engineering design for those projects proposed to achieve long-term improvements in the physical environment.
4.2 PHYSICAL SET-UP
4.2.1 Location The main access to Ghazi and Khalo is along a 30 km road from Lawrencepur on the National Highway (GT Road). Both these towns have developed along the main access road, which is typical of towns along major roads in Pakistan where control of land use is lacking. The expansion of both the towns has reached its limit towards the northwest, ie up to the edge of the Indus. The two towns are bisected by a large nullah (seasonal stream which usually flows in the monsoon period), called Khalo nullah, which is an obstacle to development.
4.2.2 Climate
Ghazi and Khalo have a severe climate with ho0t summers and cold winters. The summer temperature can yreach 47 C and the minimum winter temperature remains between 0 C and 5 C, but seldom goes below freezing. Maximum rainfall occurs in July and August with the maximum one-day rainfall also occurring in these months.
4.2 4.2.3 Topography Ghazi and Khalo have a rolling topography with a gentle slope towards the Indus river. Due to the proximity of the Ghandghar mountains in the southeast, the slope increases sharply beyond Ghazi Hamlet. This forms a natural boundary for development purposes. Three large nullahs have been formed by the run-off from the mountains. One passes to the north of Ghazi, one divides Ghazi and Khalo, as already mentioned, while the third passes to the south of Khalo.
4.2.4 Area The present total areas of Ghazi and Khalo have been calculated as 55 and 16 ha respectively. These areas have been based on information concerning the boundaries of these towns provided to the Consultants. There are, however, many vacant pockets inside the boundary limits.
4.2.5 Population The combined population of Ghazi and Khalo in 1991 was estimated to be 8,255 persons with a growth rate of 3% per annum. However, in the opinion of local people, the actual population was higher, perhaps as much as 10,000 persons.
4.3 EXISTING SITUATION
4.3.1 General
The overall impression formed after visits to these towns is that they have developed haphazardly and are squalid. The residents of Ghazi and Khalo are living in an unhealthy environment. Only recently was the area declared a Tehsil and thus there was no Town Committee. Now that Ghazi Tehsil has been formed, it is hoped that a Town Committee will soon be constituted to work for the interests of the residents. All the commercial activity of both Ghazi and Khalo has developed along the Lawrencepur-Tarbela road, which is the only metalled road passing through these towns and connects Tarbela dam with the GT road. This commercial buildup has encroached upon the right of way of the road, making it onerous for the heavy traffic to pass through. Most of the other streets are dirt tracks which are turned into mud and slush after rains.
There is no proper drainage or sewerage system in the area and the houses are connected to open drains running along the streets.
4.3 These towns totally lack any recreational facilities, whether outdoor or indoor, except for a small playground in the boys' high school. Health facilities do exist but are insufficient to cope with the expected growth in the population. The number of beds per 1000 population is,low, especially when including all the surrounding villages which depend on Ghazi for minor health facilities.
The key issues identified by the Consultants relate to: - sanitary and environmental conditions;
- solid waste collection and disposal;
- water supply system; - encroachments and traffic;
- health and education; sports and recreation;
NGOs and community participation, and the institutional set-up.
These are discussed in the following sections.
4.3.2 Sanitary and Environmental Conditions
Ghazi and Khalo do not possess any planned or proper sewerage and drainage system. Many of the houses have septic tanks and soakaway pits connected to house latrines. The kitchen and washing water flows into open unlined drains and finally finds its way into the Indus untreated. These drains often become choked by debris and solid wastes, especially plastic bags. At places the overflow of wastewater from drains inundates roads and streets, causing environmental pollution and a hazard to health.
4.3.3 Solid Waste Collection and Disposal
The disposal of solid waste in both these towns is unplanned and unhygienic. No landfill site has been designated for such purpose. The usual method employed is to dispose of garbage in depressions and/or in open spaces where it is burnt. Some of the solid waste is used by the farmers, after it has decomposed, in their fields as a soil conditioner.
4.4 4.3.4 Water Supply System The municipal water supply to Ghazi and Khalo is provided by a tubewell installed by the Public Health Engineering Department. The water is pumped to two elevated concrete storage tanks, one near Ghazi, the other near Khalo, which are connected to the water supply system. However, the water supply is inadequate and intermittent. The usual water supply timings are approximately two hours in the morning and two hours in the evening, but these are sometimes further reduced due to shortage.
4.3.5 Transportation and Traffic The commercial/economic sector development by and large is located along the Lawrencepur-Tarbela road. This has resulted in encroachments on the right of way of this district road, thereby excessively reducing the carriageway width of the road. Another factor affecting the smooth flow of traffic is the frequent stopping of buses and wagons on the main road. This causes bottlenecks, giving rise to traffic jams. There are two bus/truck stands in Ghazi, developed along this road, which are referred to as the old bus stop and the new bus stop. The new bus stop is relatively better planned with bus sheds and some planned bus parking bays. The traffic could be streamlined in a much better fashion if the encroachments could be removed.
4.3.6 Health and Education The health facilities in Ghazi and Khalo are at present below the required standards. The government has established a Rural Health Centre (RHC) at Ghazi which not only has to serve its own population but also has to provide services to all the peripheral villages. Presently it has a capacity of 8 beds but the building for 20 more beds has been completed and should start functioning soon, making a total bed capacity of 28 beds. The medical staff comprises three doctors, two male and one female, supported by one dental surgeon.
There is an animal husbandry unit located in Khalo. The education facilities in these towns are reasonably satisfactory. In Ghazi there is a high school for boys with an approximate strength of 550 students. There are also two primary schools for boys; one is a regular school with about 400 students and the other is a mosque school with about 25 students. There is also a girls primary school with about 225 students. The situation in Khalo is also quite encouraging. A government secondary school for girls has been established and an extension is underway for the addition of 11th and 12th classes. Moreover, there is one primary school for boys with 170 students and another for girls with 200 students. However, the facilities in
4.5 these primary schools are not up to the appropriate standards; children have to sit on the ground in the open or under some sort of temporary structure. There is a need for sound buildings and proper furniture. 4.3.7 Sports and Recreation These facilities are woefully inadequate for the residents. There are no properly developed outdoor grounds, and playing fields are scarce. There is no indoor facility. In the first instance, levelling and grading of open grounds can be carried out to provide playing fields and open parks for the residents.
4.3,8 NGOs and Community Participation The role of NGOs in Ghazi and Khalo is not well developed. NGOs such as Falcon Youth, Friends and Idara-e-Khidmat-e-Khalq are working on a self-help basis. There is a need to mobilise and motivate the community in both these towns to participate actively in the development programmes. As a first step, NGOs should be encouraged to mobilise the community to undertake or participate in a sanitation programme such as community cleaning of drains, etc.
4.3.9 Institutional Setup Now that Ghazi has been declared a Tehsil, it is the appropriate time to form a Town Committee and to select the correct individuals, through the democratic process, who should nurture the development works in both these towns. The development of a Tehsil Headquarters has already started and 42 kanals of WAPDA land is already being transferred to the provincial government. once a Town Committee is established, the members should then focus their attention towards such works as improving sanitation conditions, preventing further encroachments, organizing a better fruit/vegetable market and a slaughter house, and so forth. They would require funds for all these activities which can be raised through user charges and octroi collection.
4.4 ACTION PLANS
4.4.1 General
Action plans are short-term implementation plans for a city, town or a village through which special attention is focused on those aspects which require immediate action. Short-term improvement projects are recommended on the basis of the following considerations: Projects which come under the jurisdiction of government departments such as Highways, Public Health Engineering Departments, Forest Department.
4.6 - Projects which can be implemented within a period of eight months to one year and which can yield good returns in terms of aesthetics, environment and general living conditions of the people.
- Projects which can be integrated in the overall long term improvement programmes. The action plans will include the tasks described in the subsequent paragraphs.
4.4.2 Cleaning, Clearing and Improvement of Drains This activity is usually taken care of by the Town Committee. As Ghazi has been declared a Tehsil, efforts should be made to elect a Town Committee as soon as possible. The Committee can then be entrusted to take immediate action in this respect.
A detailed survey of the towns and the existing drains will be required so that a proper sewerage system can be designed and connected to the sewage treatment plant which has been proposed near Khalo (Chapter 5).
4.4.3 Collection and Disposal of Solid Waste Collection and disposal of solid waste has become a major problem in nearly all urban centres of Pakistan as well as small towns and villages. Both Ghazi and Khalo have poor solid waste collection systems. Until the Town Committee is functioning, the District Administration should purchase a few tractors and trolleys for collection of solid waste and designate places from where solid waste can be collected, and sites where waste can be disposed.
4.4.4 Removal of Encroachments from Main Road
Presently the access road to Tarbela dam has a right of way of about 30.5 m (100 ft) with a carriageway width of approximately 7.5 m (24 feet). In open country the right of way is quite clear of any buildings. However, it has decreased considerably by encroachments where the road passes through Ghazi and Khalo.
The District Administration, in consultation with other concerned departments and agencies, should initiate a survey and a programme for the removal of encroachments from the main road. The right of way of this road should be maintained and vigilance exercised against new encroachments. The policy of motivation, penalty and, as a last resort, coercive force should be applied as the situation demands.
4.7 Moreover, WAPDA and the District Administration will have to be wary and strict to keep the right of way of the power channel clear of encroachments, including maintaining the fencing along the channel.
4.4.5 Re-surfacing of Main & Access Roads The part of the main road through Ghazi and Khalo needs specific attention. In the first instance the road will have to be re- surfaced and widened. A side lane should be built for parking after the encroachments have been removed. The access roads leading from Ghazi to the Tarbela resettlement colony and the road leading from Khalo to Ghazi Hamlet would also need re- surfacing and their ROW reserved. The road connecting Khalo and Ghazi Hamlet will also have to be extended up to the main road with a proper "T" junction. All re-surfacing should be based on the appropriate standards and specifications, with cross slopes provided for draining storm water. Such drains should be constructed on both sides of the roads.
4.4.6 Improvement of Bus/Truck Stands The old bus stand is congested and has no pavement and drainage. Proper bus bays should be constructed, and storm water drainage provided. For the new bus stand, the surface should be paved and parking arrangements should be provided. During the construction of the barrage, it is envisaged that additional heavy traffic will pass through the towns and create bottlenecks and traffic jams in both the towns. The possibility of a by-pass for Ghazi and Khalo should also be studied. This would re-route heavy traffic presently passing through both these towns. This would reduce congestion but also reduce business for the shops along the existing road. Some will relocate along the new bypass, and this development will have to be controlled.
4.4.7 Construction of Sewers and Drains
A complete sewerage system should be constructed in-order to reduce health risks. This is discussed in Chapter 5 of this report. Surface water drains should be constructed in the main residential and commercial areas.
4.4.8 Improvement of Water Supply System There is an immediate need to upgrade the existing water supply system for Ghazi and Khalo in order to provide a full 24 hour supply, which will then also allow the proposed sewerage system to function correctly. A proper water distribution network is urgently needed with at least two 700 m3 capacity reservoirs to cater for the water requirements for the present and future population of these towns.
4.8 4.4.9 Provision of Open Spaces Ghazi and Khalo have no playgrounds or small play areas for children. Provision for such areas should be made in both these towns. Initially, where available space permits, vacant land can just be levelled to form small open play areas for children. Preferably, open areas should be planned adjacent to mohallah mosques or schools so that their utility can be enhanced. Open spaces near mosques can also be used for major religious congregations.
4.4.10 Tree Planting and Landscaping
Trees should be planted along all major roads and access roads, medians and footpaths. The saplings can be acquired through the Forest Department. A water bowser should be hired or bought. It could be driven by a tractor for watering the plants. Community action and education will be required if these trees are to be protected from lopping for fuelwood.
4.5 DEVELOPMENT PLAN
4.5.1 Introduction
The power channel will start just upstream of Ghazi and run along the southeast boundary of Ghazi and Khalo. It will have positive as well as negative effects on both these towns. The channel will have a top width of about 100 m and a water flow velocity of 2.33 m/s. Although flowing water is pleasant to look at, the channel will provide no chance for any recreational activity. On the contrary, due to the dangerous flow, a safety fence will be erected on both sides of the channel with limited access. However, bridges will be provided across the channel near Ghazi and Khalo towns, so that there will be free access to Ghazi Hamlet, the Resettlement Colony and to the farm land on the left side of the power channel. The types of bridges proposed in the vicinity of Ghazi and Khalo include:
- two super-passages each a with pedestrian bridge;
- two village road bridges suitable for single-lane traffic;
- one minor bridge combined with a super-passage, and
- a district road bridge over the head regulator at the barrage, on the road to Tarbela dam.
Presently Ghazi and Khalo are separated by a large nullah. As both these towns expand they will eventually become one entity, although the nullah will remain as a separator.
4.9 4.5.2 Development Restrictions
There are two features which restrict development of Ghazi and Khalo. These are the Indus river on the northwest and the three large nullahs. The power channel will be a man-made obstruction which will have to be incorporated into the overall development plan. 4.5.3 Long-Term Development Programme General Long-term development programmes encompass a wide range of activities which include the preparation of base maps, the collection of primary and secondary data, the assessment of deficiencies, the preparation of action plans, etc. Based on all the findings, a viable development plan is prepared which defines the future land use of the city/town. A 20 year period is usually taken as the time frame for the implementation of a long-term development plan. Therefore, a broad Development Plan for Ghazi and Khalo has been prepared, based on population projections up to the year 2017. The key land uses and long range development projects are discussed below. Residential Both Ghazi and Khalo have developed as agricultural towns and most of the houses are semi-pucca. These houses have been built in an irregular fashion and much vacant land remains in between the plot boundaries. Before any further expansion takes place, these pockets should be filled. For planning the future development, the gross density of the towns has been taken as 160 persons/ha (65 persons/acre). This density has been adopted from the National Reference Manual on Planning and Infrastructure Standards approved by the Ministry of Housing and Works Environment and Urban Affairs Division, which recommends residential densities for urban and rural areas.
By the year 2017, the estimated population will be 10,000 in Ghazi and 8,000 in Khalo. A total of 31 ha for Ghazi and 23 ha for Khalo will be required for expansion. This assumes that about 10% of the area will be dedicated to open space for recreation.
Housing in both these towns has reached the edge of the Indus on the northwest side and significant expansion can take place only to the southeast or southwest of the towns.
The housing should develop in the form of small neighbourhoods which should be self-sufficient in the field of education, commerce and recreation. Drawing 4.1 shows the broad development limits for Ghazi and Khalo up to the year 2017. The area proposed for expansion of these towns should be planned taking into account the following factors:
4.10 Development should be compact so that the cost of infrastructure is kept to a minimum. Areas for development should be selected which can easily be linked with the present and proposed infrastructure. The availability of transportation routes should be considered. Expansion will be dictated to some extent by natural and man-made features There will be limited access across the power channel.
Commerce Presently all the commercial activity is concentrated on the main road. This needs to be decentralised, especially as the town expands. As proper residential neighbourhoods develop, commercial centres should be planned, with central locations, which should provide items of daily use so that dependence on the main commercial area is reduced. This should be taken into account when planning the required road system.
Health
The long-term national goal for health facilities is 5 beds per thousand population. However, the medium term feasible target recommended in the National Reference Manual on Planning and Infrastructure Standards approved by the Ministry of Housing and Works is 2 beds per thousand population. According to this standard, by the year 2017 a total of 35 beds would be required for both Ghazi and Khalo. The Rural Health Centre in Ghazi will be functioning soon, with 28 beds leaving a deficiency of 7 beds for which a Basic Health Unit can be established in Khalo in the early 21st century. Education
With an estimated population of 10,000 for Ghazi and 8,000 for Khalo by the year 2017, the numbers of primary schools required for each town have been calculated as follows
TOWN BOYS GIRLS SCHOOL SCHOOL
Ghazi 3 3 Khalo 3 2
A middle school for boys would also be required in Ghazi. Moreover, with the projected population after the year 2017 the
4.11 High School for boys in Ghazi and the High School for girls in Khalo should be expanded to two sections each. Recreation
Recreational activities are almost non-existent in both Ghazi and Khalo. As the population expands and new neighbourhoods are formed, designated small areas for children should be reserved. Transportation
The design of the power channel includes two village road bridges in the vicinity of these towns. These bridges are to be utilized for connecting Ghazi and Khalo with the Resettlement Colony and Ghazi Hamlet in the southeast and with other hinterland. The internal roads in Ghazi and Khalo should at least be brick paved and new streets should have a ROW of at least 6 m (20 ft). Graveyards
There are a number of graveyards around these two towns which have existed for decades. They have space for expansion and can meet the requirements up to the year 2017.
4.5.4 Summary of Projects in Long-Term Development Programmes The following projects are recommended:
- The development of a Tehsil Headquarters, for which the acquisition of 42 kanals of land is already in progress.
- The provision of vocational training institutes and income-generating activities.
- A beautification programme for physical upgrading of the towns.
- The provision of appropriate community facilities, for example community centres.
- The provision of proper wholesale and storage facilities.
- The development of an efficient solid waste collection and disposal system.
- The provision of a proper slaughterhouse.
- Building up the capacity of the local institutions to undertake the above-mentioned tasks, including strengthening the managerial and technical aspects.
Suggested Terms of Reference for the town planning are included as Appendix 4-Al.
4.12 4.5.5 Housing for Migratory Workers Plans should be made to provide one or more residential areas for workers who will migrate from nearby areas for job opportunities associated with the Project. The labour colony sites which were developed when Tarbela dam was being constructed can readily serve for the development of new labour colonies for the Ghazi-Barotha Project or other commercial development adjacent to it, as the basic infrastructural facilities are easily available. If additional residential units are required, these should be made of temporary construction material so that, when the Project is completed, the structures can be dismantled with ease and can be reused. The labour colonies should not be located adjacent to Ghazi and Khalo towns for the following reasons:
- the high cost of the land required;
- the disruption of agricultural activity;
- the noise and congestion caused by the expected 24 hr working and associated collection and deposition of labour, and
- the disturbance of the social setup in the area.
4.6 CONCLUSIONS Ghazi and Khalo are in urgent need of:
A proper sewerage and disposal system. With the current rate of population growth, if this system is not provided, there will be serious pollution and risks to health.
A satisfactory 24-hour water supply system.
An organised system of collecting and disposing of solid waste.
A proper street layout with paved roads and storm water drainage. Except for the main road passing through these towns, no other street is paved.
Removal of the encroachments on the main road, to reduce traffic congestion.
It is foreseen that the development of both these towns up to the year 2017 will remain mostly on the right side of the power channel.
4.13 The construction of a bypass should be investigated. This would not only reduce the amount of heavy traffic passing through these towns but would also serve as a link road for peripheral areas of Ghazi and Khalo. However, existing commerce located along the present main road will relocate along the bypass, and care will be needed to prevent fresh encroachments on the new road. In the future, it is foreseen that these towns would serve as Mandi towns where agricultural produce from the adjacent towns/villages will be collected and finally transported to urban centres of Punjab and NWFP. Keeping this factor into consideration, a proper Master Plan for both these towns needs to be developed so that the future development takes place in an organised fashion. The draft Terms of Reference for this planning work are given in Appendix 4-Al. A budget estimate is also given in Appendix 4-A2.
4.14 APPENDIX 4-Al
DRAFT TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR TOWN PLANNING OF GHAZI AND KHALO
The services to be provided by the Consultants for the preparation of a town plan for Ghazi and Khalo towns shall include the following items of work:
1. Topographic Survey
The topographic survey should include the locations of all permanent or temporary structures as they appear on the ground, including items such as electric poles, drains, roads, buildings, trees, etc. Spot levels are to be taken at all significant changes of grade, at principal features and at random, and an overall plan of the two towns plotted at a reasonable scale (1:500 unless otherwise agreed) with a contour interval of 1 m.
2. Land Use Survey
The Consultants shall carry out a land use survey of Ghazi and Khalo and develop a land use plan showing the existing land use of these towns.
3. Geotechnical Investigations Soil investigations shall be carried out by the Consultants in order to gain an overall understanding of the ground conditions in both the area already occupied by the two towns and the areas proposed for expansion. The investigations are to include test pits, in-situ density tests, collection of disturbed/undisturbed soil samples and subsequent laboratory testing. The results of all geotechnical investigations are to be collected into a report.
4. Data Collection
The Consultants shall gather primary and secondary data pertaining to population growth, socio-economic conditions, infrastructural facilities, institutional setup, etc, from all available sources so that they can form a basis for future plans and proposals.
4.15 5. Analysis and Evaluation
The Consultants shall analyse the data collected in a manner so that concrete results and inferences can be formed regarding future population growth, socio-economic characteristics of the towns, infrastructural layout, indication of future growth corridors and future development programmes.
6. Planning Proposals
On the basis of primary and secondary data and their evaluation, the Consultants shall propose potential areas for future growth, indicating all major land uses and future distribution of population. The Consultants shall also, after the evaluation of all infrastructural facilities, provide a broad network for such facilities. Planning proposals should also include environmental protection, recreational development/beautification and institutional setup.
7. Phasing Development Plans
After a thorough analysis, the Consultants shall provide short term and long term phasing programmes to suit a time horizon of 20 to 25 years.
4.16 APPENDIX 4-A2
TOWN PLANNING OF GHAZI AND KHALO
BUDGET ESTIMATE
Item Description Disciplines Man- Unit Total ______|__involved _months cost (Rs) cost (Rs) ANALYSIS & EVALUATION 1 Reviewof data Planner 4 50,000 200,000 2 Populationstudies Engineers 2 50,000 100,000 3 Social analysis Economists 1 50,000 50,000 4 Physicalanalyses Architects 2 50,000 100,000 5 Institutionalanalyses Legal Advisor 1 50,000 50,000 6 Developmentplans & Geologist 1 50,000 50,000 programmes
PLANNING 7 Populationdistribution Planner 5 50,000 250,000 8 Land use Architect 4 50,000 200,000 9 Infrastructure Engineers 4 50,000 200,000 10 Tourism/recreation Economist 1 50,000 50,000 11 Environmentalprotection Horticulturalist 1 50,000 50,000 12 Institutionalaspects Animal Husbandry 1 50,000 50,000 13 Short-term phasing 14 Long-term phasing SUB-TOTAL 1,350,000
Unit Quantity Unit Total l ______cost(Rs) cost_(Rs) SURVEYS 15 Topographicsurvey I acre 300 1,000 300,000 16 Land use survey acre 300 500 150,000 17 Socio-economic survey house 100 50 5,000 SUB-TOTAL 455,000 DIRECT COSTS 18 Visits No. 15 5,000 75,000 19 Lodging night 75 500 37,500 20 Daily allowance day 90 200 18,000 21 Communication Lump sum 30,000 22 Transport Lump sum 100,000 23 Computer Lump sum I 20,000 24 Reportprinting, etc. Lump sum l 100,000 SUB-TOTAL 380,500
______0_ TOTAL_COST _ 2, 85500
4.17 I
CHAPTER 5
SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT FOR GHAZI AND KHIALO TOWNS CHAPTER 5
SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT FOR GHAZI AND KHALO TOWNS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
5.1.1 Base Data The town of Ghazi is located on the left bank of the Indus river, about 800 m downstream of the proposed barrage. Khalo village is also on the left bank, downstream of Ghazi town and separated from it by a large seasonal stream (nullah). A causeway carries the main road, namely the Lawrencepur-Tarbela road, across the nullah and connects these two towns. Within Ghazi, two main streets connect the Lawrencepur-Tarbela road to the bank of the Indus. The side streets are narrow and most are unpaved. The combined population of Ghazi and Khalo in 1991 was estimated to be 8,255 persons with a growth rate of 3% per annum. Thus the 1994 population is estimated to be about 9,020 persons. For the design of the wastewater treatment plant, this population has been projected to increase over the life of the Project at a rate of 3% per annum. An average daily per capita water demand of 136 litres has been adopted to estimate the total water consumption. The wastewater production has been assumed to be 80% of the daily water demand. The population figures and water demand have been adopted from the Report on Supplementary Environmental Studies (Ref. 5.1).
5.1.2 Existing Wastewater Collection System
Some houses have septic tanks and some have soakaway pits. Water used for cooking, washing and laundry is generally discharged to open, unlined (kaccha) drains located along the sides of the streets. The discharge from some of the septic tanks also enters these drains. Two main open drains carry wastewater to the Indus river. Because these drains cross permeable ground, a large proportion of the wastewater soaks into the ground. However, since the drains have not been constructed properly, wastewater overflows onto the streets in many places. The drains are also liable to become blocked with solid waste, particularly plastic bags. As an approximate estimate, 50% of the wastewater entering the drains reaches the Indus.
The wastewater drainage system in Rhalo is similar to that in Ghazi.
5.1 5.1.3 Purpose of Present Study As part of the mitigation measures proposed for the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project, various development works are proposed for Ghazi and Khalo in order to offset the effects of the Project, and the associated influx of construction workers, on the infrastucture and population of these towns. One important measure is the provision of an effective sewerage system, including treatment facilities. This report summarises the work done on the preliminary design and preparation of a cost estimate for such a system.
5.1.4 Planning Study A separate preliminary town planning study has been carried out and is reported in Chapter 4. This shows that Ghazi and Khalo can be expected to expand by the year 2017 to reach a combined population of about 18,000 persons. The required housing will be developed initially in open areas between the present houses, then will be developed to the south and the west of the two towns. This development will allow a sewerage system to be developed linked to a sewage treatment works located on the bank of the Indus. One of the recommendations of the planning report is that the water supply system for the two towns, presently supplying water for two 2-hour periods each day, should be upgraded to a full 24-hour supply. This upgrading will be important for the satisfactory functioning of the sewerage system.
5.2 SEWERAGESYSTEM
5.2.1 Concept
Until contour plans are available and more detailed planning studies are carried out, and a road layout plan is developed, it is not possible to define the sewerage system other than in broad terms.
Since the ground occupied by Ghazi and Khalo rises away from the river bank, it can be expected that a sewer layout can be developed which will include a trunk main alongside the river, to which will be connected lateral collectors. These would be located along the present two main streets of Ghazi. Sub- collectors would connect properties along the minor streets, their routes depending on local contours. The trunk main would convey the sewage to a treatment works, the proposed location of which is on the west side of the large nullah beyond Khalo (Drawing 5.1). The nullah separating Ghazi and Khalo would be crossed on concrete piers.
5.2 The provision of sewers in Khalo would follow the same general principles, but would be more straightforward as the contours are more favourable for a gravity system.
After the initial development to provide sewer connections to existing buildings, the sewer system would be extended in line with the expansion of Ghazi and Khalo. The trunk main and principal collectors would be sized for the ultimate population of the two towns in the year 2057 (the notional end of the Project's economic life).
5.2.2 Cost of Sewer System
In the absence of detailed plans, only an overall cost estimate can be prepared at the present time. Based on experience elsewhere in Pakistan, it is estimated that a sewer system as described above would cost about Rs 200,000 per hectare of the area served. Based on a developed area of about 120 ha by the year 2017, the total cost is estimated at about Rs 25 million.
5.3 SEWAGE TREATMENT WORKS
5.3.1 Location
In order to minimise the need for pumping, the sewage treatment works (STW) should be located in a low-lying area, ie close to the bank of the Indus. The location should also take into account the future development of the two towns. Based on these considerations, a location has been selected on the northwest side of Khalo, close to the large nullah, where the ground is low-lying and there is at present no development (Drawing 5.1).
5.3.2 Selection of Treatment Process
There are various sewage treatment processes that could be adopted. These include:
- activated sludge processes;
- trickling filters;
- stabilisation ponds, and
- aerated oxidation ditches.
The first two types are continuous flow mechanised types. The capital cost and the operating costs are both high, while the mechanical plant involved requires skilled maintenance.
5.3 Stabilisation ponds are simple to construct and operate. They are widely and successfully used in tropical and semi-tropical countries. Because they have to provide at least 21 days' retention and also have to be shallow to avoid anaerobic conditions developing, they require a large land area. Since there is pressure on land resources in Ghazi and Khalo, this type of treatment works would not be suitable. Aerated oxidation ditches are a modified activated sludge process. This process has been adopted for many treatment works in Pakistan and represents a good compromise between land take, operational simplicity, capital cost and overall efficiency. The existing three treatment plants serving the Tarbela colonies are all of the modified activated sludge type. This type is recommended for the works serving Ghazi and Khalo.
5.3.3 Design of Treatment Works The preliminary design of the Ghazi/Khalo wastewater treatment plant has been conceived in three stages. Each stage will cover a period of about 20 years, depending on the rate of growth of the two towns (Drawing 5.2). The first stage design will cater for the wastewater flows up to the year 2017.
Samples collected from the drains of Ghazi and Khalo have been subjected to biological and chemical analysis. The BOD5 of Ghazi sewage was found to be 135 mg/l and 188 mg/l while the BOD5 of Khalo sewage was 108 mg/l (Table 5.1). Part of the wastewater from the drains overflows onto the streets and much of the organic matter is dissipated into the ground. Thus the BOD5 recorded is not representative of the actual sewage strength. Instead, the BOD5 used in this design is 300 ppm, which is an average sewage strength. A preliminary design and cost estimate have been prepared of the sewage treatment plant (Drawings 5.2 to 5.4). The design of the plant has been based on the extended aeration system, assuming an ultimate population of 58,000 persons, an average per capita flow of 136 1 (30 gallons) and a peak flow factor of 1.5. Three parallel streams are proposed, the first stage having enough capacity to serve the expected population in 2017, when the second stage would be built. The third stage would be built as required to suit the further expansion of the population. The fully developed treatment works will comprise the following principal elements:
- a bar screen to remove large suspended matter, inlet channel and critical depth measuring flume;
- duplicate grit chambers with a design velocity of 0.25 m/s at peak flow;
5.4 three oxidation ditches, each with a depth of 3 m and an area of 670 m2 and equipped with four horizontal 'Mammoth' type aerators of I m diameter; three final settling tanks, each 10 m in diameter, and sludge drying beds with a total area of 9,340 m2.
5.4 ESTIMATED COSTS 5.4.1 Sewer System As stated in Section 5.2.2, the estimated cost of a sewer system to serve the area expected to be developed by 2017 is Rs 25 million.
5.4.2 . Sewage Treatment Works The estimated cost for the complete treatment works is shown on Table 5.2 and totals Rs 49.5 million, or about Rs 17.5 million for the first stage including land purchase for the complete works and 10% contingencies. The details of the first stage costs are given in Table 5.3.
5.4.3 Total Cost
The estimated total cost for the first stage sewerage system, including the purchase of the land required for all three stages of the treatment works, is Rs 42.5 million at 1993 price levels.
REFERENCES
5.1 Pakistan Hydro Consultants; Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project, Report on Supplementary Environmental Studies, July 1992.
5.5 TABLE 5.1
WASTEWATERANALYSIS OF GHAZI AND KHALO
PpH T.D.S EC HARDNESS CALCIUM. MAGNESIUM SULPHATE CHLORIDE PHOSPHOROUSPHOSPHATE AMONIA B.O.D D.O C.O.D NO. _ (C) mg/l us/rnm mg/l | mgIA I mg/A mg mg mgmgI mg mgAI mgAI mg mg/Il Ghazi Sewage
1. 5-A* 209 6.98 435 645 3301 132! 95 126 9.6 <1 <1 I 1.54 188 1.5 272 2. 5-B* |_____21.31 6.50 528 795 32 128j 92 50 28.0 <1 c1 1.46 135 1.7[ 188. KhaloSewage ,.i
3. 5-C 20.8 7.03 475 706. 280_ 112 _ 81 40 22.5 <1 <1 t 2.63 108 1.81 164! DownstreamGhazi 7 : | -- T
4. 7-A** 20.8 6.89 375 531! 315 126, 91 65 12.2 <1 <1 1.91 90 7.9 155 1 5. Dw7-nst* 21.5 7.01 395 561 325 1330 94 75 15.6 < 1 < 1 1.97 82 7.8 140l Ul!onstemKao__ I _1 _ __
6. i7-C 21.8 7.18 415; 5891 335 134 69 78 16.7 <1 <1 2.01 85 7.8 1 * samplestaken from two differentwastewater open channels ** samplestaken 200 metre apart. TABLE 5.2
SUMMARY OF COST ESTIMATE FOR SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT AT GHAZI AND KHALO
SR. DESCRIPTION COST TOTALAMOUNT NO. (Rs) (Rs) STAGE-I STAGE-II STAGE-l1l 1. Sewage Pumping Station 676,000 676,000 676,000 2,028,000 2. Bar Screen and Grit Chamber 65,000 65,000 65,000 195,000 3. Oxidation Ditch 8,185,300 8,185,300 8,185,300 24,555,900 4. Clarifier 1,570,000 1,570,000 1,570,000 4,710,000 5. Sludge Drying Beds 3,006,000 3,006,000 3,006,000 9,018,000 6. Miscellaneous 1,050,000 1,050,000 1,050,000 3,150,000 Sub-Total 14,552,300 14,552,300 14,552,300 43,656,900 7. Contingencies(10%) 1,455,230 1,455,230 1,455,230 4,365,690
8. Land Acquisition Cost 1,450,000 - - 1,450,000 Grand Total 17,457,530 16,007,530 16,007,530 49,472,590
5.7 TABLE 5.3
ESTIMATEOF COST OF SEWAGETREATMENT PLANT AT GHAZI AND KHALO SR. ITEM UNIT QUANTITY RATE AMOUNT NO. RRs) SEWAGEPUMPING STATION 1. Constructionof pump house including excavation P.C.C, R.C.Cand pipe work Item L/S 326,000 2. Pumpsfor wastewater pumpingstation: 3,200 m3/dayat 1Omhead 7 kW motors:2 pumps, 1 duty, 1 standby No 2 150,000 300,000 3. Supplyof power to pumpingstation and electricalinstallation Item L/S 50,000 BAR SCREENAND GRIT CHAMBER 4. Concretestructure and flow measurement Item L/S 25,000 5. Bar screen,galvanished M.S manually raked No 2 20,000 40,000 OXIDATION DITCH _ 6. Excavation m3 4900 42 205,800 7. Plainand reinforcedconcrete completein all respects m3 675 1,800 1,215,000 8. _Mild steelreinforcement tonnes 82 17,250 1,414,500 9. Miscellaneousitems Item L/S 350,000 10. Supplyof 4 numberMammoth rotors 5.5mlong 1.Omdia includinggear box, motorI complete in all respects Item L/S 1,250,000 5,000,000] CLARIFIER 11. One clarifierof size 10.Omdia. _built of reinforced concrete Item L/S 570,000 12. Sludgescraper for clarifier, 10.Omdia. rotatingbridge type with motor and gearboxes com lete in all respects Item L/S 1,000,000 SLUDGEDRYING BEDS 13. Opendrying beds 80m x 84m filled withfine sand, coarse gravelincluding under- drainage stem Item L/S 3,006,000 14. AccessroadsandlandsRn Item _ _700000 15. Office/laboratorybuildingc Item S0O,000 20 16. Waters pIy Item L/S 50,000 17. Perimeterfencing m 400 250 100,000 SUB-TOTAL 14,552,300 18. Contingencies _(_1___% 1,455,230 19. Land acqu_sition(for all 3 Stages) 1,450,000 TOTALCOST (STAGE 1 + ALL LAND) _ 17,4577,530
5.8 CHAPTER 6
STUDY OF SOIL FOR SPOIL BANKS CHAPTER 6 STUDY OF SOIL FOR SPOIL BANKS
6.1 GENERAL
This study provides basic information about the physical and chemical characteristics of the soils along the route of the power channel. The primary objective of the study is to investigate the type of soils that are likely to be used for the spoil banks for evaluating projected yields from irrigated cropping on the spoil banks. The results of the study will also help the formulation of pilot projects to study the development of spoil banks and to demonstrate to the farmers the maximisation of crop yields from irrigated agriculture on the spoil banks.
6.2 SURVEY METHOD
The soils of the area to be occupied by the proposed spoil banks along the power channel alignment, covering 1,640 ha, were studied in detail during February 1994. Plans and longitudinal profiles of the area at 1:5000 scale were used as field maps. The soil investigations were carried out along the centreline of the power channel. Shallow (50 to 60 cm deep) pits were dug. These were extended by auger holes up to 150 cm depth. At each auger hole site, soil characteristics such as colour, texture, pH values, calcareousness and depth to sandy/gravelly strata were recorded. Associated features such as topography and natural vegetation/land use were also recorded. A total of 84 auger holes were drilled along the alignment of the power channel. The observations were about 600 m apart. The average density of observation was one auger hole per 20 ha. Logs of these holes have been provided on Drawing 6.1.
For more detailed morphological description and sampling, 6 profile pits, logged in Drawing 6.2, were excavated at representative sites up to a depth of 160 cm. The descriptions (Appendix 6-A) were made according to the FAO Guidelines for Soil Description and Soil Survey Manual, Agriculture Handbook No. 18.
Twenty-five (25) soil samples were collected from different horizons/layers of the profile pits for the following analyses:
- saturation percentage;
- ECe and pH;
- soluble cations like Ca Mg++ ,Na+ K+;
- soluble anions like Co3 , HC0 3 , Cl, S04
- sodium adsorption ratio (SAR);
6.1 lime percentage; organic matter content;
available phosphorus; moisture percentage retained at 1/3 and 15 bars, and
particle size (mechanical) analysis.
All the above-mentioned tests were carried out in the Salinity Monitoring Directorate, SCARP Monitoring Laboratory WAPDA, Canal Bank, Moghalpura, Lahore. The tests were conducted by using methods given in USDA Agriculture Handbook No. 60. Soils data have been interpreted in terms of capability/suitability of the spoil banks for irrigated agricultural crops including vegetables and orchards adapted to the climate of the area. The findings of the study are described in the following Sections.
6.3 PHYSIOGRAPHY The proposed alignment of the power channel traverses through three landforms, namely: abandoned river plain/terrace of the Indus; loess plain, and a few rock outcrops, covering 80.6, 18.0 and 1.4% of its length, respectively. The abandoned river terrace has a nearly level to gently undulating topography interrupted at places by hummocks of various dimensions. The plain is traversed by numerous nullahs (hill torrents) originating from the eastern hills which are composed of sedimentary rocks such as sandstone and shale. The terrace belongs to the Late Pleistocene period. It lies at a higher elevation than the present flood plain and is separated by an escarpment clearly discernible on the ground. The loess plain is an aeolian deposit belonging to the Late Pleistocene period. It occurs as nearly level to gently undulating scattered patches in the middle reaches of the power channel on both sides of the GT road. These patches are separated from the adjoining lands by escarpments characteristically gullied at the edges.
The rock outcrops generally lie on the southern edges of the power channel near Kamra, between RD 33 and 36. These are of largely Cretaceous age. They have steep to very steep slopes and are largely devoid of natural vegetation.
6.2 6.4 SOIL CHARACTERISTICS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR IMPROVEMENT OF SPOIL BANKS
6.4.1 General The soils of the power channel area comprise mainly mixed Indus river alluvium and partly the silt-sized aeolian deposits called loess. Seven (7) soil textural classes have been recognized during the soil investigation of the power channel, namely: loams, fine sandy loams, sandy loams, silt loams, very fine sandy loams, loamy sands and sands. These textures have been further grouped into loamy and sandy soils. The loamy soils include the textures: loams, sandy loams, silt loams and very fine sandy loams. The sandy soils consist of loamy sands and sands. Two miscellaneous land types, gravelly and rocky areas, have also been identified. The analytical data of these soils are provided in Table 6.1.
The distribution of soil textural groups along the- power channel is given in Table 6.2. Their characteristics and recommendations for improvement are described below.
6.4.2 Deep to Very Deep Loamy Soils These soils stretch over 18,750 m (36.1%) and are the most common along the power channel, lying mainly in the middle reaches. The general topography is level to nearly level but there are scattered hummocks of silt loam/ very fine sandy loam texture in some areas. Three (3) pits and 35 auger holes were made in this unit. The soils are deep to very deep, dominantly medium textured. The texture of top soils and subsoil vary from loam to sandy loam. The structure of top soil is massive whereas the subsoil has a massive to weak coarse subangular0 blocky structure. The ECe varies from 0.4 to 1.8 dS/m at 25 C. The pH ranges between 8.0 and 8.1. The lime content varies from 1.2 to 14.2% (slightly to moderately calcareous). The soils are extremely poor in organic matter (0.04 to 1.2%) and available phosphorus (0.33 to 0.71 ppm). These soils constitute Class I land and, subject to improvement of their organic matter content, have no limitations. They are highly suitable for a wide range of agricultural crops, vegetables and orchards suited to the climate of the area. The following recommendations are made for the development of soil on the spoil bank:
- the top one metre depth of these soils should be removed and spread on the spoil banks;
6.3 proper crop rotations, green manuring and the addition of farmyard manure should be practiced to improve nutrient levels and organic activity of the spoil banks; and
-suitable trees/grasses should be grown on the sides of the spoil banks to control erosion.
6.4.3 Moderately Deep Loamy Soils The soils of this group extend over 3,815 m (7.4%) of the power channel length and lie in 6 patches mainly in the Haripur District. The area is generally level to nearly level but slightly raised at places. Ten (10) auger holes were drilled in this soil group. The soils are moderately deep silt loams/loams/sandy loams. They are underlain by gravelly and sandy strata between 50 to 90 cm depth. The colour varies from brown to dark brown. The top soil is massive while the subsoil has weak coarse and medium subangular blocky structure. The soils are non-saline. The pH is around 8.0. The soils are slightly to moderately calcareous. They are inherently low in organic matter and available phosphorus. These soils are classified as Class II land on the basis of following limitations:
- gravelly and sandy strata encountered between 50 to 90 cm depth poses a restriction to deep-rooted crops, and
- somewhat rapid percolation resulting in a low capacity to hold water and nutrients.
The following recommendations are made for improvement:
- the depth of top 50 to 90 cm of this soil should be increased to 1.0 m on the spoil bank;
- green manuring and addition of farmyard manure to improve nutrient level and organic activity of the soils for proper plant growth;
- proper crop rotation should be followed to maintain fertility level of the soil, and
- suitable trees/grasses should be planted on the sides of the spoil banks to control erosion.
6.4.4 Shallow Loamy Soils These soils extend over 2,425 m (4.7%) of the power channel length. They occur at 8 different places between RD 3 to 10 in
6.4 the Haripur District. The topography of the area is nearly level to level. Three (3) auger holes were made in this group. The soils are underlain by extremely gravelly/sandy strata below 30 to 50 cm depth. They are brown/dark brown in colour, massive to weakly structured and slightly to moderately calcareous. These soils are grouped into Class III land due to the following limitations: - shallow depth to extremely gravelly and sandy strata;
- restriction to deep and moderately deep-rooted crops;
- rapid percolation, and - low water and nutrient holding capacity.
These soils are suitable for shallow rooted and drought resistant crops. In order to obtain optimum production, following management practices should be adopted: - depth of top 30 to 50 cm of this soil should be increased to 1.0 m on the spoil bank;
- light but frequent irrigation;
- split doses of fertilizer application;
- green manuring/addition of farmyard manure to improve water holding capacity and nutrients level of the spoil banks, and
- suitable trees/grasses should be grown on the sides of the spoil banks to control erosion.
6.4.5 Deep to Very Deep Sandy Soils
These soils occupy 9,210 m (17.7%) of the power channel length and lie in 8 different patches between RD 21+000 and RD 51+000 in the Attock District. The topography is nearly level to gently undulating. One pit and 12 auger holes were dug in this unit.
The soils of this group are deep to very deep coarse textured (sands or loamy sands). The colour varies from brown/greyish brown to light olive brown/light yellowish brown. They are slightly calcareous. The lime content falls between 1.2 and 2.8% and is uniformly distributed throughout the profOile. They are non-saline and ECe is less than 1.0 dS/m at 25 C, and pH is around 8.1. These soils are inherently very poor in organic matter (0.04 to 0.08%) and available phosphorus (0.3 to 0.6 ppm). These soils are named as Class IV land because of the following limitations:
6.5 sandy nature;
rapid percolation, and
low water and nutrient holding capacity.
The soils are excessively drained and suitable for growing drought-resistant crops only. By adopting the following management practices, the yields of crops could be increased:
- if medium to fine textured soil material is found underneath these soils, it should be spread on top of the spoil banks to improve their suitability for plants;
- light but frequent irrigation and split doses of fertilizer application;
- addition of farmyard manure/green manuring to improve nutrient level and water holding capacity of the spoil banks, and - growing of suitable trees/grasses on the sides of the spoil banks to control erosion.
6.4.6 Moderately Deep Sandy Soils
This unit extends over 3,385 m (6.5%) of the power channel length. It occurs at 2 places-between RD 21+000 and RD 25+000 and at 3 places between RD 39+000 to 43+000 in the Attock District. The surface slope is nearly level to gently sloping. Eight (8) auger holes were drilled in this group. The soils are moderately deep sands/loamy sands and underlain by loamy soils (sandy loams/loams) below 50 to 90 cm depth. The colour of sandy soils is brown to greyish brown whereas loamy soils are of dark yellowish brown colour. The structure of the upper sandy soils is massive whereas the lower loamy soils are weakly structured. The soils are free of excessive soluble salts and pH is around 8.0. They are non to slightly calcareous. The content of organic matter and available phosphorus is extremely low. These soils are classified as Class IV land due to the following limitations:
- rapid percolation due to sandy surface and upper sub- soil;
- low water and nutrient holding capacity, and
- limited choice of suitable crops.
6.6 The following recommendations are made for improvement of these soils: the loamy material existing below 50 to 90 cm depth should be excavated and spread over the spoil banks to a depth of one metre so that its suitability for plants is improved; addition of farmyard manure/green manuring to develop organic activity and to improve water and nutrient holding capacity of the spoil banks; selection of drought resistant crops, and suitable trees/grasses should be grown on the sides of the spoil banks to control erosion.
6.4.7 Shallow Sandy Soils
These soils cover 9,470 m (18.2%) of the length of the power channel. These occur at 12 patches generally after RD 18 in the Attock District. The slope is nearly level to level but locally undulating. Two (2) pits and 13 auger holes were made in the soils of this unit. These soils are underlain by loamy soils (sandy loams/loams) below 30 to 50 cm depth. The colour is brown/dark brown to yellowish brown. The top soil is massive while the subsoil has weak coarse and medium subangular blocky structure. The ECe of the soils vary from 0.4 to 0.9 dS/m at 25 C. The pH ranges from 7.8 to 8.0. The soils are invariably calcareous and the lime content is between 1.2 to 4.4%. They are deficient in organic matter (0.04 to 0.12%) and available phosphorus (0.4 to 1.0 ppm). These soils are grouped into Class II land because of the following limitations: somewhat rapid percolation due to sandy texture of the top soil, and somewhat low water and nutrient holding capacity.
The following recommendations are made for improvement of these soils:
the loamy soils generally encountered below 30 to 50 cm depth should be excavated and spread on the spoil banks to a depth of 1.0 m to improve their suitability for plants;
6.7 addition of farmyard manure and green manuring to develop organic activity and nutrient level of the spoil banks, and growing of suitable trees/grasses on the sides of the spoil banks to control erosion.
6.4.8 Miscellaneous Areas This unit extends over 4,857 m (9.4%) of the power channel length. Three (3) auger holes were made in this unit. About 8% of the unit is extremely gravelly and sandy in the early and end reaches. The remaining 1.4% is a rocky area in the middle reaches of the power channel. The unit constitutes Class VI land (non- arable). The productivity of the spoil banks will depend upon the thickness of soil material spread over them. If the thickness of the soil is 90 cm or more it will constitute Class I land; if 50 to 90 cm: Class II land, and if less than 50 cm: Class III land. The recommendations for improvement of these classes have already been given.
6.5 CROP SUITABILITY RATINGS 6.5.1 General Crop suitability rating of soils is a measure of their suitability for sustained production of specified crops. These ratings are based on two factors, soil characteristics, and the climate of the area. These range from Class 1, for the most suitable soils, to Class 4 for the least or not suitable. The ratings are similar to land capability classes, with two important differences. Firstly, a crop suitability rating is a rating for an individual crop whereas a land capability class is a rating for overall crop production. Secondly, the crop suitability rating takes into account only the most favourable season of the year for the soil-crop combination under consideration, while land capability classification is based on the limitations of a soil for crop production throughout the year.
6.5.2 Suitability Classes Four suitability ratings/classes are recognised as below:
Class 1: Highly Suitable : 85 to 100% of the potential yields
Class 2: Moderately Suitable : 60 to 85% of the potential yields
6.8 Class 3: Marginally Suitable : 30 to 60% of the potential yields Class 4: Not Suitable : less than 30% of the potential yields The crop suitability ratings of the soils, their characteristics, limitations, land capability class and extent are given in Table 6.3.
It is evident that about two-thirds (62%) of the soils are highly to moderately suitable and about one-third (29%) of the area is moderately to marginally suitable for most of the proposed crops of the area. The remaining 9% of the area is not suitable for cropping. The spoil banks will be provided in the vicinity of presently cultivated areas where the soils are invariably suitable for agriculture. However, at places where spoil bank composed of material that is not suitable will be covered with suitable material.
6.9 APPENDIX 6-A
DESCRIPTIONS OF SOIL PROFILE PITS
A.1 GENERAL
As mentioned earlier, 6 profile pits were excavated, described and sampled in the represented soils of the power channel. The descriptions were made according to "FAO Guidelines for Soil Descriptions" and "Conventions of Soil Survey Manual, U.S.D.A Handbook No. 18". The soil colour notations are as per "Munsell Color Charts" (Munsells Colour Co. 1954). The logs of the soil pits are presented in Drawing 6.2.
A total of 25 soil samples were collected from different layers/horizons of the profile pits for detailed physical and chemical analysis (Table 6.1). The various physico-chemical tests were carried out in the WAPDA Laboratory as per procedures described in USDA, Agriculture Handbook No. 60.
The descriptions of soil profiles are given below.
A.2 PIT No. 1
A.2.1 General Information
Location : RD 27 + 825 Parent material River-alluvium Topography : Nearly level Source of irrigation Rainfed Natural vegetation/ land use : Eucalyptus trees Date of examination February 9, 1994
A.2.2 Pit Description 0-20cm Grayish brown (1OYR5/2) moist and pale brown (1OYR6/3) dry; loamy sand ; massive; many very fine and fine, common medium roots; moderately calcareous; non-saline (ECe 0.9 dS/m); pH 8.0; clear smooth boundary.
20-45cm Brown/dark brown (10YR4/3) moist; fine sandy loam; weak coarse subangular blocky; common fine and *medium tubular pores; few very fine and fine roots; moderately calcareous; non-saline (ECe 0.5 dS/m); pH 8.0; clear smooth boundary.
45-75cm Brown/dark brown (10YR4/3) moist; sandy loam; weak coarse and medium subangular blocky; few fine and medium tubular pores; few very fine and medium scattered coarse roots; moderately calcareous; non- saline (ECe 0.4 dS/m); pH 8.0; clear smooth boundary.
6.10 75-130cm Brown/dark brown to dark yellowish brown (1OYR4/3-4) moist; sandy loam; weak coarse breaking into medium and fine subangular blocky; few very fine and fine tubular pores; few fine roots; moderately calcareous; non-saline (ECe 0.5 dS/m) ; pH 8.0; clear smooth boundary. 130-160cm Pale brown (1OYR6/3) moist, loamy sand; massive; few very fine and fine tubular pores, no roots; moderately calcareous; non saline (ECe 0.6 ds/m); pH 7.6.
A.3 PIT No. 2 A.3.1 General Information
Location : RD 34 + 635 Parent material : Loess Topography : Nearly level Source of irrigation Rainfed Natural vegetation/ land use : Wheat Date of examinatior. n February 9, 1994
A.3.2 Pit Description 0-20cm Brown (1OYR5/3) moist and pale brown (10YR6/3) dry; silt loam; massive; few fine, medium and coarse tubular pores in the lower side; few fibrous, very fine and fine roots; moderately calcareous; non- saline (ECe 0.4 dS/m); pH 8.1; clear smooth boundary.
20-65cm Brown (1OYR5/3) moist and pale brown (1OYR6/3) dry; silt loam; weak coarse breaking into fine and medium subangular blocky; common very fine, fine and medium tubular pores; many very fine and fine, common medium and a few coarse roots; moderately calcareous; non saline (ECe 0.55 dS/m); pH 8.1; clear smooth boundary.
65-130cm Brown (1OYR5/3) moist; silt loam; weak coarse breaking into medium subangular blocky structure; common very fine and fine, few medium and scattered coarse lime concretions; moderately calcareous; non-saline (ECe 0.5 dS/m); pH 8; clear smooth boundary. 130-160cm Light yellowish brown (1OYR6/4) moist and pale brown (IOYR6/3) dry; silt loam; weak coarse subangular blocky; common very fine and fine, a few coarse tubular pores; few fibrous, very fine and fine scattered medium and coarse roots; moderately calcareous; non-saline (ECe 0.4 dS/m); pH 8.0.
6.11 A.4 PIT No. 3
A.4.1 General Information
Location : RD 40 + 965 Parent material River alluvium Topography Gently sloping Source of irrigation Rainfed Natural vegetation/ land use Fallow after wheat Date of examination February 10, 1994
A.4.2 Pit Description
0-15cm Brown (1OYR5/3) moist and pale brown (1OYR6/3) dry; loamy sand; massive; no pores; few very fine, fine and medium roots; slightly calcareous; non-saline (ECe 0.7 dS/m); pH 8.1; clear smooth boundary.
15-55cm Grayish brown (1OYR5/2) moist; loamy sand; massive; few fine and medium tubular pores; scattered medium and fibrous, many fine roots; slightly calcareous; non-saline (ECe 0.5 dS/ni) ; pH 8.0; clear smooth boundary.
55-110cm Light olive brown (2.5YR5/4) moist and light yellowish brown (2.5Y6/4) dry; sand; massive; scattered fine and very fine tubular pores; few very fine and fine, common fibrous roots; slightly calcareous; non-saline (ECe 0.45 dS/m); pH 8.0; clear smooth boundary.
110-160cm Grayish brown to light olive brown (2.5YR5/2-4) moist and light yellowish brown (2.5YR6/4) dry; sand; massive; no pores; few fibrous and very fine roots; slightly calcareous; non-saline (ECe 1.8 dS/m) pH 8.0.
A.5 PIT No. 4
A.5.1 General Information
Location RD 46 + 100 Parent material : River alluvium Topography : Nearly level to gently sloping Source of irrigation Rainfed Natural vegetation/ land use : Fallow after ground nut Date of examination February 10, 1994
6.12 A.5.2 Pit Description 0-25 cm Brown (lOYR5/3) moist and pale brown (1OYR6/3) dry; sand; massive; no pores; few fibrous, common very fine and fine, few medium roots; slightly calcareous; non- saline (ECe 0.85 dS/m); pH 8.0; clear smooth boundary.
4 25-760 cm Dark grayish brown (1OYR4/2) moist; loamy sand; weak coarse breaking into fine and medium subangular blocky; many very fine, common fine and medium tubular pores; few fine and medium, common fibrous roots in patches; few krotovina; slightly calcareous; non- saline (ECe 0.75 dS/m; pH 8.1; clear smooth boundary. 70-110 cm Brown (IOYR5/3) moist; sandy loam; weak coarse subangular blocky; common fine and medium, few very fine tubular pores; few fibrous and very fine roots; slightly calcareous; non saline (ECe 0.4 dS/m); pH 8.1; clear smooth boundary. 110-160cm Brown (1OYR5/3) moist; loamy sand with 5 to 10% gravels by volume in the matrix; massive; common very fine and fine, few medium tubular pores; few medium and coarse roots; slightly calcareous; non-saline (ECe 0.65 dS/m); pH 8.0.
A.6 PIT No. 5 A.6.1 General Information
Location : RD 1 + 775 Parent material : Loess Topography : Nearly level, terraced field Source of irrigation Rainfed Natural vegetation/ Wheat land use Date of examination February 11, 1994
A.6.2 Pit Description 0-20cm Pale brown (1OYR6/3) moist; silt loam; massive; common fine and medium tubular pores; common fine and medium, few coarse roots; slightly calcareous; non-saline (ECe 0.70 dS/m); pH 8.0; clear smooth boundary.
20-60cm Brown (1OYR5/3) moist; silt loam; weak coarse subangular blocky; common very fine and fine few medium tubular pores; few very fine and fine, common medium and coarse roots in patches; moderately calcareous; non-saline (ECe dS/m); pH 8.0; clear smooth boundary.
6.13 60-110cm Brown (1OYR5/3) moist; silt loam; weak coarse subangular blocky; few fine and medium tubular pores; common very fine and fine, few medium and common fibrous roots in patches; moderately calcareous; non- saline (ECe 0.45 dS/m); pH 8.0; clear smooth boundary. 110-160cm Pale brown (1OYR6/3) moist; silt loam; common fine and medium, few coarse tubular pores; few medium and fine, common fibrous roots in patches; few krotovina; moderately calcareous; non saline (ECe 1.8 dS/m); pH 8.0.
A.7 PIT No. 6 A.7.1 General Information
Location : RD 18 + 750 Parent material : River alluvium Topography : Nearly level Source of irrigation Rainfed Natural vegetation/ land use Fallow after ground nut Date of examination February 11, 1994
A.7.2 Pit Description 0-25 cm Brown/dark brown (1OYR4/3) moist; loam; massive; few fine and medium tubular pores in the lower side; few very fine and fine roots; slightly calcareous; non- saline (ECe 0.75 dS/m); pH 8.1; clear smooth boundary. 25-70 cm Dark yellowish brown (1OYR4/4) moist; clay loam/loam; weak coarse subangular blocky; few fine and medium, few coarse tubular pores; few fibrous and very fine, few coarse roots; slightly calcareous; non- saline (ECe 0.40 dS/m); pH 8.0; clear smooth boundary. 70-130 cm Brown/yellowish brown (1OYR5/3-4) moist; sandy loam/loam; weak coarse subangular blocky; few fine and medium tubular pores; few medium and coarse roots; slightly calcareous; non-saline (ECe 0.55 dS/m) ; pH 7.5; clear smooth boundary. 130-160 cm Brown (1OYR5/3) moist, loamy sand; massive; no pores; no roots; slightly calcareous; non-saline (ECe 0.55 dS/m); pH 7.3.
6.14 TABLE 6.1
PHYSICO- CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF PIT SAMPLES
______S Sh e t I oo f 2
Depth Satura- pH ECe Saturation Extrac Analysis (meq/1)_____ SAR CaCO3 Avail- fOrganic Moisture Percentage Avatilable Mechanical Analysi Textural (3ass cmt tion dS/ma %age able j matter Retained at Bars Moisturel %age at 251C + P %age Percentage Cay St Sand
PIT NO I SALWSNY SOILS OVER LOAM SoIlS
0- 20 25 8.0 0.90 7.5 1.5 0.4 Nil 2.5 2.5 43 0.8 4.0 0.57 0.04 9.00 4.04 4.96 10.00 15.0 75.0 Loamysand 20- 45 25 8.0 0.50 4.0 0.8 03 Nil 1.5 1.5 2.0 0.5 4.4 0.52 0.04 1039. 4.99 5.40 10.00 24.0 66.0 Sandy loam 45- 75 25 8.0 0.40 3.5 0.6 02 Nil 1.0 1.5 1.9 0.6 4.0 1.00 0.04 10.50 5.14 5.36 4.0 32.0 64.0 Sandy loam 75-130 25 8.0 0.50 4.0 0.8 0.2 Ngl 1.0 1.5 2.5 0.5 3.6 0.33 0.04 9.09 4.12 4.97 5.0 22.0 73.0 Sandy loam 130-160 25 8.0 0.60 5.5 0.9 0.1 Nil 2.0 1.5 j3.0 0.5 3.2 0.38 0.04 6.67 2.97 3.70 9.0 7.0 84.0 Loamysand 0\ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~PITNO.2 (DEP LOAMY SOILS) Hq 0- 20 35 8.1 0.40 3.5 0.9 02 Nil 1.5 1.5 1.6 0.7 142 0.29 0.04 25.87 8.83 17.04 10.0 78.00 12.0 Silt loam 20- 65 35 8.1 0.55 4.5 0.9 02 Nil 1.5 2.0 2.1 0.6 13.6 0.33 0.04 26.11 8.74 17.37 11.0 78.0 11.0 Sitla 65- 130 40 8&1 0.55 4.5 1.2 02 Nil 2.0 1.5 2.4 0.8 12.8 0.54 0.04 26.03 8.88 17.15 11.0 78.0 11.0 salt loam 130-160 35 8.1 0.40 2.5 1.6 02 Nil 1.0 1.5 1.8 1.4 12.8 1.13 0.04 27.56 8.84 18.72 13.0 78.0 9.0 Silt lom
PIT NO.3 (DEP SANDY SOILS) 0- 15 25 8.0 0.65 5.5 I1.2Nil NO 2.0 2.0 2.7 0.7 1.2 0.33 I0.046.86 3.49 3.37 8.0 8.0 84.0 Loamysand 15- 55 25 8.0 0.80 7.0 I1.3 Nil Nil 2.5 2.5 3.4 0.7 2.8 0.58 I0.04 6.94 3.59 3.25 5.0 11.0 84.0 Loamy sand 55-110 25 8.0 0.80 6.5 j1.0 NHl Nil 2.0 2.5 3.0 0.6 2.4 0.65 0.04 5.98 2.89 3.09 5.0 7.0 87.0 Sanrd 110- 160 25 8.0 0.50 4.0 j1.0 Nil Nil 1.5 1.5 2.0 0.7 2.0 0.29 0.08 5.42 2.74 2.68 2.0 7.0 91.0 Sand TA.BLE6.1 PHYSICO -CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF PIT SAMPLE-S
______S heShee t 22oo f 2
Depth Satura- pH ECe Saturation Extract Analysis (meq/1)J SAR CaCO3 Avail- Organic Moisture PercenLageAvailable -Mechanical Analysis Textural Class cm. tion dS/mS0 %age able mtatter Retained at Bars Moisture %age at 25C M - - 13%a5bars Percentage Ca2y Silt Sand
PIT NO. 4 MERTLDEEP SANDY SOILS OVER LOAMY SOLS)
0- 25 25 8.0 0.85 7.5 1.2 02 Nil 2.5 I2.5 3.9 0.6 1.6 0.90 0.12 5.81 2.59 3.22n 5.0 8.0 87.0 Sand 25- 70 25 8.1 0.75 6.5 1.2 021 Nil 2.5 2.5 2.9 0.6 2.0 0.41 0.08 8.48 4.36 4.12 8.0 11.0 81.0 Loamysand 70-110 25 8.1 0.40 3.0 1.2 0.2 NOl 1.0 I1.5 1.9 0.9 2.8 023 0.04 9.30 4.80 4.50 9.0 14.0 77.0 Sandy loam 110-160 25 8.0 0.65 5.0 1.5 02 Nil 2.0 2.0 2.7 0.5 2.8 0.40 0.00 9.35 4.76 4.59 7.0 14.0 79.0 Loamy sand PIT NO. 5 (DEP LOAMY SOILS)
0- 20 40 8.0 0.70 5.5 1. 0.1 Nil 2.0 2.0 3.1 0.9 4.0 0.32 0.08 31.17 10.00 21.17 16.0 72.0 12.0 Sift foam 20- 60 48 8.0 0.50 4.0 1.4 0.1 Nil 1.0 2.0 2.5 1.0 6.0 0.5 0.12 31.99 10.10 21.89 17.0 73.0 10.0 Siltloam -. 60-110 50 8.0 0.45 3.0 1.6 0.3 Nil 1.0 2.0 1.9 1.3 7.6 0.31 0.04 31.58 10.30 21.28 15.0 76.0 9.0 Siltloam O~ 110-160 35 8.0 1.80 6.0 123 0.1 Nil 2.0 7.0 9.4 7.1 92 0.39 0.00 31.18 10.20 20.98 15.0 73.0 12.0 Siltloam PIT NO.6 (DE OMY SILS) 0- 25 I 30 8.1 0.75 6.5 1.5 0.1 Nil 2.0 3.0 3.1 I0.83.2 0.71 0.08 12.35 5.90 6.45 9.0 33.0 58.0 Sandyloam 25-70130 8.0 0.40 3.0 1.0 0.1 Nil 1.5 1.0 1.6j0.8 2.8 0.55 0.08 12.12 5.80 6.32 14.0 24.0 62.0 Sandy loam 70-130 I 25 8.0 0.55 4.5 1.4 0.1 Ngl 1.5 2.0 2.5 I0.9 12 0.36 0.04 I936 4.29 I 5.07 12.0 14.0 74.0 Sandyloam 130-160 j 25 8.0 0.55 5.0 1.6 0.1 Nil 2.0 2.0 2.7 j1.0 12 0.38 0.08 j 5.69 2.57 3.12 9.0 2.0 j89.0Sand TABLE 6.2
DISTRIBUTIONOF SOIL TEXTURALGROUPS
Sheet 1 of 3 S.No. SOILTEXTURAL REACH LENGTH PERCENTAGEX CLASSIFICATION REDUCEDDISTANCE (km) (meter)
1. Deepto very deep loamy 1+485 to 2+085 600 soils 2+375 to 2+850 475 9+240 to 11+300 2060 13+270 to 14+960 1690 14+960 to 17+960 3000 18+415 to 18+995 580 19+855 to 20+380 525 24+670 to 25+530 860 26+030 to 28+625 2595 29+ 105 to 30+690 1585 31+615 to 32+895 1280 33+055 to 33+355 300 33+590 to 35+530 1940 35+995 to 36+655 660 45+895 to 46+495 600
Sub Total: 18750 36.1
2. Moderatelydeep loamy 0+980 to 1+325 345 soils underlainby very 3+545 to 4+050 505 gravellyand sandy strata 5+430 to 5+640 210 below 50 to 90 cm depth 6+605 to 6+935 330 11+300 to 13+270 1970 17+960 to 18+415 455
Sub Total: 3815 7.4
3. Shallow loamy soils 3+170 to 3+285 115 underlainby very gravelly 4+050 to 4+360 310 and sandy stratabelow 4+445 to 4+585 140 30 to 50 cm depth 4+770 to 5+270 500 6+070 to 6+605 535 6+970 to 7+105 135 7+290 to 7+480 190 8+740 to 9+240 500
Sub Total: 2425 4.7
6.17 TABLE 6.2
DISTRIBUTIONOF SOIL TEXTURALGROUPS
Sheet 2 of 3 S.No. SOILTEXTURAL REACH LENGTH PERCENTAGE CLASSIFICATION REDUCEDDISTANCE (km) (meter)
4. Deep to very deep sandy soils ?1+670 to 22+690 1020 30+690 to 31+615 925 37+110 to 38+990 1880 38+990 to 39+420 430 40+280 to 41+330 1050 41+640 to 41+985 345 43+445 to 45+715 2270 50+335 to 51+625 1290
Sub Total: 9210 17.7
5. Moderatelydeep sandy soils 21+300 to 21+670 370 underlainby loamy soils 23+730 to 24+670 940 below 50 to 90 cm depth 39+420 to 40+280 860 41+330 to 41+640 310 41+985 to 42+890 905
Sub Total: 3385 6.5
6. Shallowsandy soils underlain 8+260 to 8+740 480 by loamy soils below 30 to 50 cm 18+995 to 19+855 860 depth 20+380 to 20+960 580 20+960 to 21+300 340 22+690 to 23+730 1040 25+530 to 26+030 500 28+625 to 29+105 480 32+895 to 33+055 160 36+655 to 37+110 455 42+890 to 43+445 555 45+715 to 45+895 180 46+495 to 50+335 3840
Sub Total: 9470 18.2
6.18 TABLE 6.2
DISTRIBUTION OF SOIL TEXTURAL GROUPS
Sheet 3 of 3 S.No. SOIL TEXTURAL REACH LENGTH PERCENTAGE CLASSIFICATION REDUCED DISTANCE (km) (meter)
7. Miscellaneous Area
a) Extremely gravelly& 0+000 to 0+980 980 sandyarea 1+325 to 1+485 160 2+085 to 2+375 290 2+850 to 3+170 320 3+285 to 3+545 260 4+360 to 4+445 85 4+585 to 4+770 185 5+270 to 5+430 160 5+640 to 6+070 430 6+935 to 6+970 35 7+105 to 7+290 185 7+480 to 8+260 780 51+625 to 51+912 287
Sub Total: 4157 8.0
b) Rocky area 33+355 to 33+590 235 35+530 to 35+995 465
Sub Total: 700 1.4
Grand Total: 51912 100.0
6.19 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ /
TABLE 6.3
CROP SUITABIUTY RATINGS
SUITABILITYRATING* Soil Limitaton Land Extent RABI KHARF Capability %age Wheat Barley PulsesI Oil Toba- Vege- Fodderi Maize Millet Sorg-j G.nut IGow- Pulses Vege- Fodde S.CaneOrc- Class l | Seeds cco table l l hum | ara tables hard
Deep very deep loamy None i 36.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 soils
Moderatelydeep loamy Some what rapid 11G 7.4 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 soils underlain by very percolationand some gravelly and sandy strata what restrictionto deep rooted crops
Shalbw loamysoils Rapidpercolation III G 4.7 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 4 underlain by gravelly and restrictionto and sandy strata deep and modesrately deep rooted crops
Deep sandy soils Rapid percolation, IV 17.7 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 1 2 3 3 3 4 3 Low water and nutrient holding capacity
GI Moderatelydeep sandy Rapid percolation, IV 6.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 2 2 1 2 3 3 3 4 3 soils under lain by low water and N loamy soils nutrient holding capacity
Shallowsandysoils Somewhatlowwater lIs 18.2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 underlain by loamy soils and nutrient holding capacity
MiscellaneousArea
Gravelly/RockyArea Non-arable VI 9.4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Total: 100.0
Class 1. Highly Suitable : 85 to 100 percent of the potentialyields Note: - Rabivegetables include potato,tumip, carrots,spinach, cauliflower, raddish, onion and garlic. C lass 2. Moderately suitable : 60 to 85 percent of the potentialyields - Kharf vegetablesinclude chillies,bottle gourd, brinal and lady finger. Class 3. MargenallySuitable : 30 to 60 percentof the potentialyields Class 4. Not Suhable : Less than 30 percentof the potential yields CHAPTER 7
AGRICULTURAL POTENTLAL OF THE SPOIL BANKS CHAPTER 7 AGRICULTURAL POTENTIAL OF THE SPOIL BANKS
7.1 INTRODUCTION 7.1.1 Objectives of the Study After the implementation of the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project, an estimated 1,640 ha along the power channel will be developed as agricultural land on the spoil banks. After necessary levelling, the area will be covered with topsoil and converted into irrigated land through the installation of tubewells. The proposed utilisation of the spoil banks is to allocate them to the farmers whose land will be acquired for construction and other civil uses of the Project. The estimated total privately-owned agricultural land to be acquired for the Project is: Irrigated 196 ha Barani 2,287 ha Owners of presently irrigated lands will be provided with an equal amount of irrigated land on the spoil banks, whereas the owners of presently barani (rain-fed) land will receive irrigated plots on the spoil banks equal to half the size of their current holdings. Because of the potentially greater productivity of irrigated land, the barani farmers have indicated a willingness to accept new irrigated plots which are half the size of their present holdings (Ref. 7.1). The agricultural potential of the spoil banks has been studied to ascertain potential productivity levels for irrigated land. The compensatory principles of the Project Resettlement Action Plan assumed a 1:2 productivity ratio between barani and irrigated land. The purpose of this study is to examine whether or not this is a reliable assumption.
7.1.2 Methodology
This study presents the results of a comparative analysis of productivity levels in the Project area between irrigated and barani agriculture. For this purpose, the present cropping pattern, present crop yields and farm inputs of both irrigated and barani areas of Attock District, where most (87%) of the Project area lies, have been established. The data has been supplemented with field visits and interviews with the local farmers to adjust the official cropping pattern and crop yields to account for specific conditions in the Project area.
On the basis of these refined data, the crop gross margins for all crops have been calculated under irrigated and barani
7.1 conditions. Previous studies show that upon conversion from barani to irrigated agriculture, farmers often adopt high value cash crops like vegetables in the new cropping pattern. Therefore, in addition, farm budgets for the same size of farm under typical barani and irrigated cropping patterns have also been computed and the benefits are expressed in financial and monetary terms. The results of the study are presented in the following sections.
7.2 PRESENT AGRICULTURE 7.2.1 Present Barani Cropping Pattern and Intensity
Cropping patterns and intensities are considered a measure of the existing level of agricultural development of an area. Therefore, data on the areas under different crops have been obtained from the Director, Crop Reporting Service, Punjab, for Attock District for the last three years, ie 1989-90 to 1991-92 (Ref. 7.2).
The existing cropping patterns and intensities have been computed on a three-year average and the resulting data are shown in Table 7.1. This indicates that, under the prevailing barani conditions, the average annual cropping intensity is computed at 77.1%, with kharif * making up 21.4% of the total and rabi 55.7%. As observed in the table, drought resistant crops, such as sorghum, millet, groundnut, wheat, oilseeds (rapeseed and mustard), are grown in the area. The prominent crops in kharif are sorghum (11%), groundnut (8%), maize (2%) and pulses (0.5%). In rabi the major crops are wheat (51.7%), oilseeds (2.2%) and grams (1.9%). The overall cropping pattern is shown diagramatically in Drawing 7.1 (Ref. 7.3).
7.2.2 Present Barani Crop Yields Present crop yields are very low as most of the land to be acquired is dependent on rains. The yearly barani crop yields for Attock District from 1989-90 to 1991-92, based on published data of Agricultural Statistics of Punjab, are shown in Table 7.2. This indicates considerable annual variation in crop yields, mainly due to fluctuations in rainfall. Therefore, to achieve better accuracy in estimating agricultural benefits, the most recent available 3 years weighted average of yields has been considered to represent the existing situation. These average yields are also shown in Table 7.2 (Ref. 7.4 and 7.5).
7.2.3 Barani crop Production Based on the average cropped area (1989-90 through 1991-92) for the Project region and average crop yields ( 1989-90 through
* Kharif : The summer cropping season (April to September) Rabi : The winter cropping season (October to March)
7.2 1991-92) for Attock District, the existing estimated crop production is given in Table 7.3.
7.2.4 Barani Farm Inputs
Due to uncertainty in water availability and low production from barani agriculture, the use of only small quantities of chemical fertilizer and pesticides has been reported by the farmers. The prevalent seed rates, numbers of ploughings, plankings and labour requirements reported by the farmers have been recorded and are shown in Tables 7.4 and 7.5.
7.2.5 Irrigated Agriculture The present cropping pattern, crop yields and crop production, along with the farm input level practiced on irrigated land (ie on 196 ha) have been established and are given in Tables 7.6 to 7.10.
7.3 AGRICULTUREON SPOIL BANKS
7.3.1 General Under the Project, excavated spoils will be placed on both banks of the power channel. After the necessary levelling of spoil material, the spoil banks will be dressed with top soil and the land converted into agricultural land. This land will be provided with 150 tubewells and resold to the farmers losing land to the Project. To predict the productivity of this land, it is necessary to establish future cropping levels and crop yields. For agricultural development on the spoil banks, improved levels of farm inputs and farm practices have been assumed. The annual cropping pattern and intensities and crop yields have been assumed to reach full development over a period of 4 years. Thereafter, the cropping intensity and crop yield and farm input levels have been assumed to be constant.
The achievement of optimal production is based on the following prediction schedule: Year one : land acquisition, construction of spoil banks, completion of resettlement activities. Year two : first cropping year; achievement of 50% of predicted optimal productivity. Year three : second cropping year; achievement of 75% of predicted optimal productivity.
7.3 Year four third cropping year; achievement of optimal productivity.
7.3.2 Proposed Cropping Pattern and Intensities: Basic Consideration The adoption of a suitable and feasible cropping pattern is essential if the full benefits of those investments made for compensation to the farmers are to be realised. A number of alternatives for future cropping patterns and intensities have been considered. Based on available resources, a diversified cropping plan with an annual cropping intensity of 135% has been projected for agricultural development on the spoil banks. The following factors have also been given due consideration:
- Existing cropping pattern and intensities in the adjoining irrigated areas.
- Agro-climatic conditions of the area.
- Availability of agricultural labour, farm machinery and implements. - Optimum availability of irrigation water. - Marketing and transportation facilities.
- Socio-economic features of the area.
- Local and regional food requirements.
-Agriculture extension and research facilities available for the farmers. Soil characteristics as identified through soil studies.
The proposed cropping pattern and intensities for the land to be developed on the spoil banks of the power channel are presented in Table 7.11. This indicates that the proposed annual cropping intensity comes to 135%. The kharif (68%) - rabi (67%) ratio works out to 1:1. The proposed cropping pattern is diversified in nature and includes high value vegetable crops as is practiced in other irrigated areas of the region (Drawing 7.2). As there is no sugar mill in the vicinity of the Project, sugarcane has not been proposed as part of the new cropping pattern on the spoil banks. Moreover, due to the expected un- suitability of the sub-soil, orchards, which require deep rooting, have not been proposed (Ref. 7.6). In this regard it should be noted that the areas of sugarcane and orchards are
7.4 negligible in the currently irrigated areas adjoining the Project area.
7.3.3 Justification for Selection of Crops The various factors affecting the choice of the proposed major crops to be cultivated on the spoil banks are described in the following paragraphs: Maize
- Project soils are well suited for maize production.
- Maize is already grown locally in irrigated areas (up to 29%). Therefore, the farmers are familiar with the practices of maize cultivation.
- Maize is an important cereal crop in the area and can meet the food requirements of the farm population.
- Ecological conditions are favourable for its production.
- The crop gross margins of maize have been calculated and found acceptable.
- Maize stalks, both green and dry, are very commonly used for feeding domestic animals throughout the year and dry stalks can be stored for emergency use.
- Maize grains can be stored and transported to any market of Pakistan for sale at any time of the year.
Chillies
- Agro-climatic conditions in the area are favourable for their production.
- The soil of the spoil banks will be well suited for chillies production.
- As a cash crop, chillies are an important income crop of the area.
- The gross margins of chillies have been evaluated and have been found profitable.
- Dry chillies can be transported to any market of Pakistan for disposal at any time of the year.
- Availability of irrigation water will not be a constraint.
7.5 Vegetables (Lady's finger, cauliflower, etc) Gross margins have been worked out and found acceptable and profitable. The soil to be placed on the top of the spoil banks is well suited to vegetable cultivation. Agro-climatic conditions are favourable as these vegetables are successfully grown in the adjoining irrigated areas of the Project.
Rawalpindi, Islamabad, Attock are easily accessible markets where the produce can be sold. As facilities of transport and village roads already exist in the area, the transportation of vegetables for quick sale is feasible. Farmers like to grow vegetables because of the high return per hectare.
Onion/Garlic
Project soils will be well suited for production of onion and garlic. As cash crops, onion and garlic are important farm income crops of the area. The gross margins of onion/garlic have been calculated and found profitable.
The farmers are already familiar with the cultivation of onion and garlic, as these are grown in irrigated areas of the Project region.
Onion/garlic is an important component of food for the local population and is also produced for farm family consumption.
Ecological conditions are favourable for its production. Rawalpindi, Islamabad and Attock markets are accessible for the sale of green bulbs.
Dry bulbs can be transported to any market of Pakistan for disposal at any time of the year.
Potato
Labour for making ridges, sowing and uprooting of potato is already available in the area.
7.6 This vegetable already is popular with farmers in the irrigated areas of the region. Farm inputs like seed, fertiliser and plant protection material are available with the relevant agencies. Potato is an important food for farm family consumption and for the local population.
Potato can be stored for long periods and can be transported to any market of Pakistan for sale at any time of the year. Sufficient irrigation water will be available for potato cultivation.
Tobacco
- Project soils are favourable for production of tobacco.
- Tobacco is an important cash crop in the area.
- Agro-climatic conditions are favourable for its production.
- The skill and technology of tobacco cultivation is available in the area. Presently it occupies about 4% of the total irrigated area.
- The necessary infrastructure for transportation, processing and marketing is available in the area.
-Crop water requirements for tobacco cultivation will be fulfilled through tubewell development on the spoil banks.
Computation of crop gross margins of tobacco has indicated that the cultivation of tobacco is profitable.
Wheat
Wheat is the staple food of the local population. Project farmers are already well acquainted with wheat cultivation as it occupies more than 50% in the present cropping pattern of both irrigated and un-irrigated agriculture. The soils of the spoil banks will have the required potential to achieve higher production under irrigation as the existing top layer will be placed on top of the spoil banks.
7.7 Wheat can withstand a shortage of irrigation water to some extent. The infrastructure for transportation and marketing is already available for the sale of surplus produce.
7.3.4 Crop Yields on the Spoil Banks The projected crop yields for the land developed on the spoil banks have been based on:
- existing crop yields achieved in the irrigated areas of Attock and Haripur Districts in which the Project area falls;
- the yields obtained elsewhere in Punjab;
- potential crop yields reported by the Agricultural Department, and the other technical and agriculture factors affecting the establishment of projected yields.
The factors and assumptions considered in establishing of yields are briefly described below:
According to the findings of the soil studies (Table 6.3), the Project soils possess the production potential for the crops proposed for cultivation on the spoil banks.
Dependable and adequate irrigation water supplies of acceptable quality would be made available to meet the crop water requirements.
Pilot projects at four different locations along the power channel will be established as agricultural demonstration farms for guidance and advisory services to the farmers.
Agro-climatic conditions are suitable for obtaining the proposed yields for the proposed crops. The skills and technologies for production of the proposed crops are already available in the area as no new crop has been included in the cropping pattern. Agricultural inputs, ie seed, fertilizer and pesticides, are made available in the area by the Agriculture Department and dealing with such agencies is a normal part of local work styles.
7.8 The local agricultural extension services are strong enough to guide and recommend the scientific use of chemical fertilizer and pesticides to obtain increased production.
A special programme for the modernisation of traditional agriculture through training and visit (T&V) programmes is in operation in the area. This will be very helpful for the quick transfer of improved farming technology to the farmers.
The majority of farms are 5 ha or less in the Project area, and are classed as small farms. Therefore, the farmers can be provided with cheap loans to purchase inputs and farm equipment. The programme to construct additional link roads in the area will improve transportation and marketing facilities for quick disposal of the farm products and thereby result in better prices for agricultural produce. This will encourage the farmers to increase their crop yields.
Crop yields projected for agricultural development on the spoil banks are given in Table 7.12. The table indicates that the projected yields are almost equal to the existing level of irrigated yields in the vicinity of the Project, except for some minor difference in some crops. Therefore, these yields are realistic and can be achieved in the field. Due to the progressive implementation policies of WAPDA, the proposed optimum yield will be achieved in a period of 4 years after the land is levelled and handed over to farmers (Ref. 7.7).
7.3.5 Agriculture Production The agriculture production estimated for the spoil banks is given in Table 7.13. The crop production brought about by the reclamation of spoil banks has been estimated at 649 tonnes for maize, 42 tonnes for sorghum, 46 tonnes for chillies, 2,597 tonnes for vegetables, 209 tonnes for onion, 418 tonnes for potato, 121 tonnes for tobacco and 1,943 tonnes for wheat.
7.3.6 Incremental Production
The incremental crop production has been worked out by sub- tracting the present crop production from the projected crop production of irrigated agriculture on spoil banks and is presented in Table 7.14. The table indicates that, with the development of the spoil banks, the incremental production has been estimated as 772 tonnes of cereal, 2,670 tonnes of vegetables, 231 tonnes of condiments (chillies and onion) and 3,674 tonnes of fodder.
7.9 7.3.7 Farm Inputs Basis The estimate of farm inputs, ie seed, fertilizer, plant protection materials and labour requirements, necessary to achieve the projected yields have been made according to the recommendations of Agriculture Department of Punjab. In addition, the views of the Agriculture Extension Specialists have also been obtained through discussions and interviews in order to supplement the published data. The estimated quantities fully correspond with the proposed crop yields for the spoil bank areas.
Seed and Planting Material Improved seed, free of infestation, is necessary to obtain optimum production. The use of recommended seed rates is also very important to achieve the desired plant population in the field. To ensure good quality of seed and optimum seed rate, the agriculture staff should be consulted by the farmers to obtain improved and certified seed. In addition, agriculture extension staff should provide guidance and advisory services for proper sowinq and spraying. The seed multiplication of imported and approved seed, especially of vegetables, should be done at the pilot farms to be established by the Resettlement Authorities under the guidance and supervision of Agriculture Specialists. The data regarding the seed rates approved and recommended by the Agriculture Department are presented in Table 7.15. The table indicates that the seed rate for maize is higher than that recomiaended by the Agriculture Department (30 kg/ha). This enhanced seed rate has been adopted keeping in view the prevailing practice of continuously cutting out the selected plants from the maize fields for feeding livestock until a desired plant population is achieved. The total project seed requirements have been worked out and are given in the same table (Ref. 7.8).
Fertilizer Fertilizer is the most effective input to increase crop yields. Its supply and application at the right time and with an optimum combination of different nutrients is essential to obtain target production. An estimate of the future requirements for area coverage and quantity of nutrient to be applied per hectare is also a pre-requisite to attain optimal production. In addition, calculating the desired ratio of the three major nutrients, namely nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium, for proper application is necessary to derive full benefits and to provide guidelines for institutions supplying agricultural inputs. The nutrients for fertilizer applied per hectare have been established according both to the extent of fertilizer response in increasing the crop yields and to the incentives assumed to be provided to the
7.10 farmers. The projected amount of nutrients to be applied per hectare has been set out in Table 7.16. The future total requirements for the whole of the area of the spoil banks is worked out and is given in the same table (Ref. 7.9). Plant Protection Plant protection measures are essential to save crops from damage by insects and pests, particularly those crops which are easily susceptible, like vegetables. As the proposed cropping pattern constitutes a substantial area under vegetables, provision of adequate and timely spraying is necessary to achieve target production. With the increased use of fertilizers and provision of optimum irrigation supplies, the crops are likely to become succulent and more susceptible to insects and pests. The population of insects and pests would increase considerably due to a favourable environment for their multiplication. Agronomic practices like crop rotations, adjustment of sowing time, use of healthy seed and pest resistant varieties can go a long way in minimizing the crop losses from insects, pests and diseases. However, the application of pesticides to control insects and ,pests is the most effective remedial measure. As such, the percentage of cropped area to be covered with plant protection measures and area treated during each development year have been estimated and are given in Table 7.17. Labour & Tillage Requirements The number of ploughings and plankings for preparatory tillage and seed bed preparation of various crops are given in Table 7.18. These are based on discussions with the officials of the Agriculture Department.
The labour requirements in terms of man-days of hired and family labour are also indicated in the same table. These are also based on discussions held with the officials of the Agriculture Department and past experience on similar projects in the Punjab and NWFP.
As irrigated agriculture requires substantially more labour than barani, the implementation of the Project eventually will provide additional employment opportunities to farm labourers and tenants on land to be acquired for the Project.
7.4 FARM BUDGETS
7.4.1 General
Farm budgets for a representative farm size of 3.44 ha have been prepared, both for the existing situation, ie barani farming, and for the proposed spoil banks, ie irrigated agriculture. The objective is to assess the ratio of the farm returns to be expected with the two types of farming.
7.11 7.4.2 Methodology To assess the farm income under barani and irrigated farming, crop budgets have been prepared for various crops. The crops include those presently being cultivated as well as those which could be profitably grown under irrigated agriculture. The crop budgets are presented in Tables 7.19 and 7.20 for barani and irrigated spoil banks, respectively. Based on the crop budgets, farm budgets have been prepared on the basis of cropping intensities and crop yields discussed earlier. In the farm budgets, farm net return has been computed for the farm as a whole as well as per hectare.
7.4.3 Farm Budgets Farm budgets for each of the two scenarios have been prepared on the basis of market prices adjusted to the farmgate. The budgets thus prepared are detailed in Table 7.21. The results in Table 7.21 show that the net farm return per hectare in respect of barani farm is about Rs 3,440, while that of spoil banks (irrigated agriculture) is about Rs. 13,460. The ratio of farm return per hectare between the barani and irrigated farm works out as 1:3.91. This leads to the conclusion that a farmer who is provided with half the area of irrigated land that he presently owns as barani land can be expected to see a substantial increase in income.
7.5 CONCLUSIONS The agricultural productivity of the present areas of irrigated and barani land required for the Project can be compared with the predicted productivity of the irrigated land on the spoil banks as follows:
7.12 PRESENT AGRICULTURE FUTURE PRODUCTIVITY RATIO PRES/FUTURE
IRRIGATED BARANI IRRIGATED
LAND AREA (ha) 196 2,287 1,640 0.66
PRODUCTION (tonnes):
Cereals 118 1,471 2,593 1.63
Sorghum 6 107 42 0.37
Vegetables 345 - 3,014 8.73
Oilseed, g'nut 8 196 73 0.36
Condiments 23 - 255 11.2
Fodders 551 4,243 7.7
Tobacco 13 - 121 9.3
TOTAL 1,064 1,774 10,341 3.6
The principal conclusion that can be drawn is that the overall productivity of the irrigated spoil banks can be expected to exceed, by a factor greater than 3, the present productivity of the irrigated and barani land required for the Project. In terms of value, and thus overall farm income, a typical farmer presently working on barani land can be expected to nearly double his present income.
REFERENCES
7.1 Pakistan Hydro Consultants; Ghazi-Gariala Hydropower Project, Feasibility Report, Volume 7, Environmental Assessment, Aug. 1991.
7.2 Agricultural Statistics of Punjab; 1989-90 to 1991-92.
7.3 Agricultural Statistics of NWFP; 1989-90 to 1992-93.
7.4 Punjab Development Statistics, Bureau of Statistics, Government of the Punjab, 1992.
7.5 Punjab Agricultural Statistics, 1980-81 to 1989-90.
7.6 FAO; Guidelines for Predicting Crop Water Requirements, Irrigation and Drainage Paper No. 24, 1977.
7.13 7.7 FAO; Yield Response to Water, Irrigation and Drainage Paper No. 33, 1979.
7.8 Khoso A.W; Crops in Sindh, 1981.
7.9 Recommendation by Agriculture Department (pamphlet).
7.14 TABLE 7.1
EXISTING BARANI CROPPING PATTERN AND INTENSITIES (Cultivated Area = 2287 ha)
CROPS AREA INTENSITY
KHARIF MAIZE 46 2.00 SORGHUM 251 10.99 GROUNDNUT 182 7.95 PULSES 11 0.47
KHARIF TOTAL 490 21.41
RABI WHEAT 1,182 51.66 OILSEEDS 50 2.18 GRAM 43 1.87
RABI TOTAL 1,274 55.71
ANNUAL TOTAL 1,764 77.13
SOURCE: PUNJAB AGRICULTURAL STATISTICS, 1989-90 to 1991-92.
7. 15 TABIE 7-2 EXISTING BARANI CROP YIELDS Cultivated Area -2287 ha Kg / ha
1989-90 1990-91 1991-92 Weighted CROPS Average
KHARIF MAIZE 865 894 872 876 SORGHUM 439 425 416 426 GROUNDNUT 876 922 922 907 PULSES(Mung) 184 183 183 183
RABI WHEAT 1,158 1,286 1,294 1,245 OILSEEDS(Rapeseed) 643 689 548 627 GRAM 186 196 98 159
SOURCE: PUNJAB AGRICULTURAL STATISTFICS,1989-90 TO 1991-92.
7.16 TABLE 7.3 EXISTING BARANI CROPPED AREA, YIELDS AND PRODUCTON IN PROJECT AREA
Cultivatcd Arca = 2287 ha
CROPS AREA YIELI) PRODUCTION (ha) (Kg/ha) (Tonncs)
KIIARIF MAIZE 46 876 40.10 SORGIIUM 251 427 107.19 GROUNDNUT 182 907 164.90 PULSES(Mung) 11 183 2.02
KH-IARIFTOTAL 490
RABI WIIEIAT 1.182 1245 1,470.91 OILSEED(Rapeseed) 50 627 31.31 GRAM 43 159 6.77
RABI TOTAL 1.274
ANNUAL TOTAL 1764
SOURCE: PUNJAB AGRICULTURAL STArIS'I'ICS. 1989-90 TO 1991-92.
7 . 17 TAB131J7.4 EXISTING B3ARANI LEVEL OF FARM INPUTS
Cultivated Arca = 2287 ba
SEfED RATl'E 'FRT'ILIZER N U M BEI' R O l PLANT I'ROTECTI(N MEASURIS
CROPS Nutricnts
Kg/ha Kg/ha I>LOUCIIING I'LANKING (96 Arca Sprayed) (No of Sprays) N--P--K
MAIZE 30 18-- 9--o 2 1 SORGIHUM 50 I0-- 0--C 2 1
GROUNDNUT 75 10--15--0 2 l PULSES(Mung) 20 0-- 0--0 2 1
WIIEAT 110 33--16--0 2 l OILSEEDS 5 6--11--0 1 0
GRAM 35 0-- 0--0 I 0
SOURCE: Disctssiosis wvitI the local Agricultural Officers and farmers.
7.18 TABLE 7.5
EXISTING BARANI LEVEL OF MANUAL LABOUR REQUIREMENTS Cultivated Area 2287 ha
CROPS Mandays/ha Hlired Ilhrcshing Charges Other Charges % % of Yicld
MAIZE 15 0
SORGI-IUM 8 0
GROUNDNUT 27 70 2.5*
PULSES(Mung) 8 0
WI-IEAT 16 30 10
OILSEEDS 8 0
GIRAM 8 0
* Tractor hours for uprooting
SOURCE: Discussions with the Local Agricultural Officers and farmers.
7. 19 TABLE 7.6 EXISTING IRRIGATED CROPPING PATTERN AND INTENSITIES OF THE PROJECT AREA Cultivated Arca = 196 ha
CROPS Intensity Arca % lha
KIJARIF MAIZE 30.43 60 SORGhI-UM 4.70 9 GROUNDNUr 1.40 3 CHILLIES 1.30 3 KIJARIF VEr-ECr..(Lady's finger) 7.97 16 FOIDDER (Jawar) 22.32 44
KIIARIFTOTAL 68.12 134
RAil~~~~~~
Wl-ILAT 49.94 98 OILSEEDS 1.36 3 GARLIC 1.58 3 POTATOES 2.91 6 ItABI VEGETABLES 4.13 8 RABI FODDER 2.77 5 T-OBACCO 3.66 7
IRABI TOTAL 66.36 130
ANNUAL TOTAL 134.48 264
SOURCE: PUNJAB AGRICULTURAL STATISTICS. 1989-90 TO 1991-92.
7.20 TABLE 7.6.A EXISTING IRRIGATED CROP YIELDS Cultivated Arca = 196 ha Kg / ha
CROPS 1989-90 1990-91 1991-92 Wcightcd Adopted - Avcrage
KIIARIF MAIZE 1.237 1,384 1.324 1.314 1.320 SORGI-IUM 625 667 600 640 640 GROUNDNUT 1.569 1.571 1,567 1.569 1.570 PULSES(Mung) 400 400 1.000 455 CHILLIES 1.385 1,386 1.384 1.385 1.390 KIIARIF VEGE.(Lady's finger) 7,542 8.262 8.262 8.149 8,1.50 FODDER (Jawar) 10.619 11,061 10.543 10.748 10.700
RABI WHEAT 2.183 2,401 2,473 2.363 2.370 OILSEEDS 1.000 1.000 2.000 1,333 1.330 GARLIC 6.588 6.269 6.455 6.370 6.370 POTATOES 7.938 7,978 9.415 8,494 8.500 RABI VEGE.(Cauliflower) 19.209 19,209 19.200 19.206 19.200 RABI FODDER(Lucern) 16.000 12.000 16.000 14.857 14.900 TOBACCO 1.844 1,844 1.846 1.845 1.850
SOURCE: PUNJAB AGRICULTURAL STATISTICS. 1989-90 TO 1991-92.
7.21 TABLE 7.7
EXISTING IRRIGATED CROPPED AREA,YIELDS AND PRODUCTION IN THE PROJECT AREA. Cultivatcd Area - 196
CiROPs CROP'PED) AREA YIEl-)13S PRODUCTION (ha) (Kg/ha) (tonncs)
KI AltIF MAIZE 60 1,314 78.35 SORGIIUM 9 640 5.90 GROUNDNUT 3 1,569 4.30 CHILLIES 3 1,385 3.53 KIIARIFVEGE.(L.ady's fingcr) 16 8,149 127.29 Kl-LARIFFODDER(Jawir) 44 10,748 470.27
KHAIUAlTOTAL 134
ltABI WIIEAT 98 2,363 231.32 OILSEEDS 3 1,333 3.55 GARLIC 3 6,370 19.76 l'OTAT OES 6 8,494 48.49 RABI VEGE.(Cauliflower) 8 19,206 155.47 RABI FODDER(Lucern) 5 14,857 80.55 TOBACCO 7 1,845 13.25
RABI TOTAL 130
ANNUAL TOTAL 264.
SOURCE: IPUNJABAGRICULTURAL STATISTICS,1989-90 TO 1991-92.
7.22 TAIII.I3 7.8
EXISTrING IRRIGATED LEVEL OF FARM INPU'T'S Cultivated Arca = 196 la
_SEBDRATE PB3RTXI17z1R N U M B B R OP PLANT PRCYllICrION MllASUJRIIS CROPS Nutrients Kg/ha Kg/ha PI.OIUGIIING PLANKING (% Arca Sprayed) (No of Sprays)
N p K
MAIZE 30 55 28 28 2 1 0 0 SORGIItIM 25 10 7 0 1 I 0 0 GROtlNDNtT 75 50 1()( 0 4 2 0 0 CillIES 0.5 115 58 50 6 3 100 4 Kl ARIF VEGE.(Iy s Finger) 25 115 5tS 50 6 3 too 5 Ki IARIIP ODDERS(Jawar) 60 25 0 0 2 I 0 0 %%1IEAT 100 80 40 0 4 2 50 1 OILSEEDS 7.5 45 45 0 2 1 50 1 ONION 12.5 113 88 60 6 2 100 4 RABIVEGE.(Cauliflower) 1.25 115 57 63 6 3 100 6 I'OTATOES 1,5(tt 85 60 40 4 2 100 2 RABI FODDER(Lucem) 20 20 50 0 4 2 0 0 TOBACCO 0.04 75 75 63 6 3 100 4
SOURCE: Discussious with the ocal Ag*ciuhural Officers and famiers in the Projec Area.
7.23 TABLE 7.9
EXISTING LEVEL OF MANUAL LABOUR REQUIREMENTS FOR IRRIGATED AREAS Cultivated Area = 196 ha
CROPS Man-days / ha Ihired Thrcshing Charges Other Charges % % of Yield
MAIZE 25 20 10 SORGIIUM 15 20 GROUNDNUT 43 20 5 CIIILLIES 115 70 KIIARIF VEGE.(Lady's Finger) 105 70 KH-lARIFFODDERS(Jawar) 15 0 WHEAT 30 30 10 OILSEEDS 20 0 ONION 75 80 3* RABI VEGE.(Cauliflower) 70 80 POTATOES 60 90 3* RABI FODDER(Lucern) 20 0 TOBACCO 85 80
* T ractor hours for uprooting SOURCE: Discussions with the local Agricultural Officers and farmers
7.24 TABLE 7.10 EXISTING CROP PRODUCTION
IRRIGATED BARANI
CROPS TOTAL PRODUCTION AREA PRODUCllON AREA PRODUCTION ha tonncs ha tonnas (TONNES)
KIHAR.IF MAIZE 60 7835 46 40.10 118.45 SORGHUM 9 5.83 251 107.19 113.01 GROUNDNUT 3 4.30 182 164.90 169.20 CHILLIES 3 3.53 0 0.00 3 53 KHARIFVEGE.(Lady's ringer) 16 140.55 0 0.00 140.55 FODDERS 44 470.27 0 0.00 470.27 PULSES 0 0.00 11 2.02 2.02
KHARIF TOTAL 134 490
RABI WIIEAT 98 231.32 1.181.54 1.470.91 1.702.23 OILSEEDS 3 3.55 50 31.31 34.86 ONION&GARLIC 3 19.76 0 0.00 19.76 POTATOES 6 48.49 0 0.00 48.49 RABI VEGETABLES 8 155.47 0 0.00 155.47 RABI FODDER S 80.55 0 0.00 80.55 TOBACCO 7 13.25 0 0.00 13.25 GRAM 0 0.00 43 6.77 6.77
RABI TOTAL 130 1274
ANNUALTOTAL 264 1764
7.25 TABLE 7.11
PROPOSED CROPPING PATTERN, INTENSITIES & CROPPED AREA "WITH" PROJECT (FOR SPOIL BANKS) (IRRIGATED) Cultivated Area = 1640 ha
CROPS INTENSITY CROPPED AREA (%) (ha)
KHARIF
Maize 30.0 492 Sorghum 4.0 66 Groundnut 2.0 33 Chillies 2.0 33 Vegetables 10.0 164 Fodders 20.0 328
Sub-Total 68.0 1115
RABI
Wheat 50.0 820 Oilseeds 1.0 16 Onion 2.0 33 Potatoes 3.0 49 Vegetables 4.0 66 Fodders 3.0 49 Tobacco 4.0 66
Sub-Total 67.0 1099
ANNUAL 135.0 2214
7_ 2 6 TABLE 7.12
EXISTING CROP YIELDS AND ADOPTED YIELDS (IRRIGATED & SPOIL BANKS) Cultivatcd Area = 196 ha Kg/ ha
CROPS 1989-90 1990-91 1991-92 Weighted Adopted Average
KIIARIF MAIZE 1.237 1.384 1,324 1,314 1.320 SORGHUM 625 667 600 640 640 GROUNDNUT 1,569 1.571 1.567 1.569 1.570 PULSES(Mung) 400 400 1,000 455 CHILLIES 1.385 1.386 1,384 1.385 1.390 KHIARIFVEGE.(Lady's finger) 7.542 8,262 8.262 8.149 8.150 FODDER (Jawar) 10.619 11,061 10.543 10,748 10.700
RABI WHEAT 2,183 2.401 2.473 2.363 2.370 OILSEEDS 1,000 1,000 2.000 1.333 1.330 GARLIC 6.588 6.269 6.455 6.370 6.370 POTATOES 7.938 7.978 9,415 8,494 8.500 RABI VEGE.(Cauliflower) 19.209 19.209 19.200 19.206 19.200 RIABIFODDER(Lucern) 16.000 12,000 16.000 14.857 14,900 TOBACCO 1,844 1,844 1,846 1,845 1.850
SOURCE: PUNJAB AGRICULTURAL STATISTICS, 1989-90 TO 1991-92.
7.27 TABLE 7.13
PROJECTED CROP PRODUCTION "WITH" PROJECT (FOR SPOIL BANKS) Cultivated Area = 1640 ha
Area Yields Production CROPS (ha) (Kg/ha) (Tonnes)
Maize 492 1,320 649 Sorghum 66 640 42 Groundnut 33 1,570 51 Chillies 33 1,390 46 Kharif Vegetables 164 8,150 1,337 Kharif Fodders 328 10,700 3,510 Wheat 820 2,370 1,943 Oilseeds 16 1,330 22 Onion 33 6,370 209 Potatoes 49 8,500 418 Rabi Vegetables 66 19,200 1,260 Rabi Fodders 49 14,900 733 Tobacco 66 1,850 121
7.28 TABLE 7.14 INCREMENTAL CROP PRODUCTION "WITH PROJECT (FOR SPOIL BANKS) Cultivated Area = 1640 ha (Tonnes)
CROPS EXISTING FUTURE INCREMENTAL
Maize 118 649 531 Sorghum 113 42 0 Groundnut 169 51 0 Chillies 4 46 42 KharifVegetables 141 1,337 1,196 KharifFodders 470 3,510 3,039 Wheat 1,702 1,943 241 Oilseeds 35 22 0 Onion 20 209 189 Potatoes 48 418 370 Rabi Vegetables 155 1,260 1,104 Rabi Fodders 81 733 653 Tobacco 13 121 108
SUMMARY Cereals 1821 2593 772 Vegtables 345 3014 2670 Condiments 23 255 231 Fodders 551 4243 3692 Tobacco 13 121 108
7.29 TABLE 7.15
PROJECTED SEED REQUIREMENTS "WITH" PROJECT Cultivated Area 1640 ha
CROPS CROPPED AREA SEED RATE TOTAL ha Kgtha (Kilogrammes)
Maize 492 50.0 24,600.00 Sorghum 66 25.0 1,640.00 Groundnut 33 75.0 2,460.00 Ouihies 33 0.5 16.40 KllarifVcgetablcs 164 25.0 4,100.00 Kharif Fodders 328 60.0 19,680.00 Wheat 820 100.0 82,000.00 Oilseeds 16 7.5 123.00 Oniion 33 12.5 410.00 Potatoes 49 1,500.0 73,800.00 Rabi Vcgetables 66 1.3 82.0 Rabi Fodders 49 20.0 984.00 Tobacco 66 0.04 2.64
SOURCE: Recoinnicidatiojisof thc Departmneitof Agriculturcand discussions
7. 30 TABLE 7.16 PROJECTED FERTILIZER REQUIREMENTS HWITH" PROJECT Cultivated Area = 1640 ha
CROPS Cropped Arca Nutricnts (Kg/h) Total Nutricnts (Tonnes) (ha)IL N P K N P K
Maize 492 50 25 0 24.60 12.30 0.00 Sorghunm 66 10 7 0 0.66 0.46 0.00 Groundnut 33 50 100 0 1.64 3.28 0.00 Chillies 33 115 58 50 3.77 1.90 0.00 Klarif Vegetables 164 115 58 50 18.86 9.51 0.00 KCharifFodders 328 25 0 0 8.20 0.00 0.00 Wheat 820 80 40 0 65.60 32.80 0.00 Oilseeds 16 45 45 0 0.74 0.74 0.00 Onion 33 113 88 60 3.71 2.89 0.(J0 Potatoes 49 85 60 40 4.18 2.95 0.00 Rabi Vegetables 66 115 57 63 7.54 3.74 0.0 Rabi Fodders 49 20 50 0 0.98 2.46 0.00 Tobacco 66 75 75 63 4.92 4.92 0.00
SOURCE: Recommendationsof the Departimientof Agricultureand discussions
7.31 TABLE 7.17
PLANT PROTECTION MEASURES "WITI-I" PROJECT Cultivated Arca = 1640 ha
CROPS Cropped Arca Percent Arca Sprayed No. of Sprays Area Sprayed (ha) (ha)
Maize 492 0 0 0 Sorghum 66 0 0 0 Groundiiut 33 0 0 0 Chillies 33 100 32.8 4 Kharif Vegetables 164 100 164 5 Kharif Fodders 328 0 0 0 Wheat 820 50 410 1 Oilseeds 16 50 8.2 1 Olnioni 33 100 32.8 4 Potatoes 49 100 49.2 2 Rabi Vegetables 66 100 65.6 6 Rabi Fodders 49 0 0 0 Tobacco 66 100 65.6 4
SOURCE: Recommendations of the Department of Agriculture and Dicussions
7 .32 TABLE 7.18 TRACTION & MANUAL LABOUR PER HECTARE REQUIRED "WITH" PROJECT Cultivated Area = 1640 ha
CROPS Number of Man days Hired /ha % Ploughings Plankings
Maize 2 1 25 20 Sorghum 2 1 15 20 Groundnut 4 2 43 20 Chillies 6 3 115 70 Kharif Vegetables 6 3 105 70 Kharif Fodders 2 1 15 0 Wheat 4 2 30 30 Oilseeds 2 1 20 0 Onion 6 3 75 80 Potatoes 4 2 60 90 Rabi Vegetables 6 3 70 80 Rabi Fodders 4 2 20 0 Tobacco 6 3 85 80
SOURCE: Recommendations of the Department of Agriculture and discussions
7.33 TABLE 7.19 BARANI AREAS PERI IlECFARE GROSS MAIIGIN (FINANCIAL PRIICES)
DESCRIPTION/CROPS WHIATI, GRAM PULSES SORGIIUM GROUND MAIZE OILSEEDS NUT
RETURNS
Yield (kg) 1.245 159 183 426 907 876 627 Price/kg (Rs.) 4.48 12.70 14.00 5.58 11.98 3.78 12.10 GROSS REVENUES 5.576 2.019 2.563 2.377 10.865 3.310 7.588
COST1S Ploughings 2.5 1.0 2.5 2.5 3.5 2.5 1.0 Unit cost (Rs.) 180.0 180.0 180.0 180D 180.0 180.0 180.0 Total (Rs.) 450.0 180D 450.0 450D 630.0 450.0 180.0
Seed Rate (kg) 100 30 20 30 100 30 5 Price/unit (Rs./kg) 5.15 14.60 16.10 6.42 14.37 4,53 13.92 Total (Rs.) 515.1 438.0 322.1 192.5 1437.5 136.0 69.6
Fertilizer N Nut (kg) 20 0 0 10 10 10 6 Unit rate (RsJkg) 9.02 9.02 9.02 9.02 9.02 9.02 9.02 Total (Rs.) 180A 0 0 90.2 90.2 90.2 54.1
Fertilizer P Nut (kg) 10 0 0 0 5 5 5 Unit rate (Rs.Ikg) 7.98 7.98 7.98 7.98 7.98 7.98 7.98 Total (Rs.) 79.8 0 0 0 39.9 39.9 39.9
Sprays (No.) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Area sprayed (%) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Unit rate (Rs.) 53125 53125 53125 531.25 53125 53125 531.25 Total (Rs.) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Hired Labour-days 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Unit rate (Rs.) 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 Total (Rs.) 520.0 520.0 520.0 520.0 520.0 520.0 520.0
Fanily Labour-days 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Unit rate (Rs.) 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 Total (Rs.) 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Water Rate (Rs.) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SUB-TOTAL 1.745 1,138 1.292 1.253 2.718 1.236 864 Contingencies @5% 87 57 65 63 136 62 43 TOTAL COSTS (Rs.) 1.833 1.195 1,357 1.315 2,853 1.298 907
Value ofwheat straw 266 15 0 0 299 0 57
NET VALUE OF PRODUCTION 4.010 838 1.206 1.061 8.311 2.012 6.739
7.34 TABLE 7.20
PER BECTARE GROSS MARGIN (FINANCIAL PRICES) SPOIL BANKS
DESCRPTIONCICOPS WIHAT RP-ODDER OUSEEDS ONION POTATO CAUW- TCtBACO SORCHUM GROUND MAIZE CIflIJES LADY- XLIDDER PLOWER NUT FINGER
RETURNS
Yield (Kg) 2.370 14.900 1.330 6.370 8S500 19,200 1.850 640 1.570 1,320 1.390 8,150 10.700 Price/kg (Rs) 4.48 0.73 12.10 5.68 3.58 2.38 34.98 5,S 11.98 3.78 39.95 5.08 0.98 Giom Rvea.ea 10.615 10.863 16.096 36,176 30.422 45.678 64.711 3.571 1tS807 4.988 55.525 41.394 10.476 COSTS Ploughinss 5.0 5.0 2.5 7.5 5.0 7.5 7.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 7.5 7.5 2.5 Unit cost (Rs) 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 130.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 180.0 Total (Rs.) 900.0 900.0 450.0 1.350.0 900.0 13.50.0 1.350.0 450.0 900.0 450.0 1.350.0 1,350.0 450.0
Seed Rate (kg) 100 20 8 13 1500 1.25 0 25 100 30 0.50 25 60 Unit tate (Rs.) 5.15 25.00 13.92 200.00 4.47 100.00 500.00 6.42 14.37 4.53 50.00 15.00 4.53 Total (Rs.) 515.1 500.0 104.4 2,500.0 6.710.7 125.0 20.0 160.4 1,437.5 136.0 25.0 375.0 272.1
FeutiDzerNNut (kg) 80 20 45 113 85 115 75 10 50 50 115 115 25 Unit Ynle (Rs.) 9.02 9.02 9.02 9.02 9.02 9.02 9.02 9.02 9.02 9.02 9.02 9.02 9.02 Total (Rs.) 721.7 180.4 406.0 1.019.5 766.8 1.037.5 676.6 90.2 451.1 451.1 1,037.5 1.037.5 225.5
UlT FertiCizerP Nut (kgs) 40 50 45 148 100 120 138 7 100 25 108 108 0 Unit rate (Rs.) 7.98 7.98 7.98 7.44 7.44 7.44 7.44 7.98 7.98 7.98 7.44 7.44 7.98 Total (Rs.) 319.1 398.9 359.0 1,101.0 743.9 892.7 1,026.6 55.8 797.8 199.5 8034 803.4 0.0
Sprays (No.) 1 0 1 4 2 6 4 0 0 0 4 5 0 Area sprayed (%) 50 0 50 100 100 100 100 0 0 0 100 100 0 Uiiit ratce (Rs.) 531.25 531.25 531.25 531.25 531.25 531.25 531.25 531.25 531.25 531.25 531.25 531.25 531.25 Total (Rs.) 265.6 0.0 265.6 2.125.0 1,062.5 3,187.5 2.125.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2,125.0 2,656.3 0.0
Hired Labour-days 30 20 20 75 60 70 85 15 43 25 115 105 15 Utnit rate (Rs) 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 Total (Rs.) 1,95D.0 1.300.0 1,300.0 4,875.0 3,900.0 4,550.0 5.525.0 975.0 2,795.0 1,625.0 7,475.0 6.825.0 975.0
FamilyLabour-days 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Unit rate (Rs) 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 Total (Rs.) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Cost o(Watef (Rs.) 682.0 1.013.1 484.3 682.0 1.418.4 682.0 1,418.4 583.2 583.2 775.9 1,418.4 1,418.4 1,013.1
SUB-TOTAL (Rs.) 5,354 4.292 3.369 13,652 15.502 11.825 12.142 2.315 6.965 3.637 14.234 14,466 2.936 Cost tituXes @5% 268 215 168 683 775 591 607 116 348 182 712 723 147 TOTALCOSTS (Rs.) 5.621 4.507 3.538 14,335 16,277 12.416 12.749 2,430 7,313 3.819 14,946 15.1 9 3.083
Valueotwheatstraw 507 0 293 0 0 0 0 480 393 495 0 0 0
NETVALUEOPPRODUCrION 5.501 6.356 12,851 21.841 14.145 33.262 51.963 1.620 11.887 1.664 40.579 26.206 7,393 TABLE 7.21
FARM BUDGETS AT FINANCIAL PRICES (3.44 ha FARM) (Rupees)
DESCRIPTION EXIST'ING PROPOSEI) (BARANI) (SPOIL BANKS)
INFLOWS
GROSS VALUE OF PRODUCTION
Wheat 12,060 19,131 R. Fodder 0 1,121 Oilseed 569 564 Onoion 0 2,489 Potato 0 3,140 Cauliflower 0 6,285 Tobacco 0 8,904 Surghum 899 557 Groundnut 2,971 1,321 Maize 228 5,659 Chillies 0 3,820 Lady Finger 0 14,240 Kharif Fodder 0 7,207 Gram 131 0 Pulses 41 0
TOTAL 16,898 74,438
OUTFLOWS
INPUT'S
Ploughing 1,335 3,669 Seed 1,577 2,405 Fertilizer N 441 2,752 Fertilizer P 181 1,619 Sprays 0 2,513 Watcr Charges 0 3,980
Sub-Total Inputs 3,534 16,937 Labour 1,529 11,193
TOTAL OPERATING 5,063 28,131
NET FARM RETURN /FARM 11,835 46,307 NETr FAIRM RETURN / IIECl'ARE 3,441 13,461
RATIO OF RETURNS: IRRIGATED/13ARANI 3.91
7 .36 CHAPTER 8
TRANSMISSION LINES CHAPTER 8
TRANSMISSION LINES
8.1 INTRODUCTION
8.1.1 Project Background The Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project is briefly described in Chapter 1 of this Supplementary Report, which also reviews the history of environmental studies for the Project. At the time of the original EA (1990) and the first Supplementary Environmental Studies (1991), the planning of the transmission lines for the Project was not sufficiently advanced to permit an environmental assessment. This fact was noted by the World Bank's Environmental/Resettlement Review Panel in the Bank's Aide Memoire of June/July, 1993. That Aide Memoire established the guidelines for the transmission line EA and noted the Bank's preference for avoiding "the construction of high voltage electrical lines over settlements or individual houses."
8.1.2 Regulatory Background The laws, regulations and guidelines governing the design, construction, and operation of the transmission lines for the Project and its environmental assessment are discussed in detail in Section 8.2 below.
Laws of Pakistan
The authority of WAPDA to construct and operate electrical transmission lines was established in 1958 under the West Pakistan Water and Power Development Act, which assigns to WAPDA the powers and obligations of a licensee under the Electricity Act of 1910. These laws establish policy on land acquisition and compensation, as well as the degree of liability of WAPDA for damages sustained by landowners or others. The World Bank
Briefly, the World Bank allows each country to establish its own standards for the design of transmission lines on Bank funded projects, provided those are consistent with international engineering and safety practices. The Bank has issued guidelines for the performance of environIiental assessments, in the form of Operational Directive 4.01, which supplements, rather than replacing, any national or local requirements. The Bank also provides technical guideline to EA preparers in its "Environmental Assessment Sourcebook" (Ref. 8.1), Volume III of which contains a brief section on transmission lines.
8 .1 Public Health and Safety
There have been a number of important recent studies of the potential health effects of electromagnetic fields (EMF), without providing a consensus as to the existence or degree of effects (Ref. 8.2). WAPDA's transmission engineers are studying available reports with an eye to developing national policy at such time as conclusive evidence is available to guide the design standards. At present, WAPDA applies the standards contained in the National Electrical Safety Code (ANSCI C2), applied in the United States. This establishes minimum clearance distances between the lowest points of transmission conductors and the ground, structures, and vegetation. For lateral clearances, WAPDA employs a minimum distance of 25 m from the centreline of the r.o.w. to inhabited structures and slightly less to uninhabited structures, except that no structure may be within 25 m of the centre of a tower. Where necessary for passing through dense urban areas, these distances are diminished slightly. This does not apply to the lines for this Project, none of which will pass through densely populated areas.
WAPDA Transmission Line Organisation
WAPDA maintains a substantial division for Transmission and Grids, under a Managing Director who reports directly to WAPDA's Member (Power). Among the numerous subdivisions of Transmission and Grids is one called Grid Systems Operations, responsible for maintaining the condition of the lines and the corridors under them.
8.1.3 Approach to the Study This environmental assessment was conducted in the Lahore offices of Pakistan Hydro Consultants and in the field during March and April, 1994. The assessment consisted of the following activities:
A review of earlier Project reports, maps, memoranda, and other documents pertaining to the transmission lines.
Detailed examination of the 1991 aerial photographs (at a scale of 1:10,000) to locate existing and proposed routes and identify points of special interest.
A four-day field reconnaissance by a PHC ecologist and two PHC social scientists, accompanied by WAPDA transmission line planners. A separate survey was performed by a PHC senior environmental scientist in March 1994.
8.2 Meetings with villagers living near the Tarbela-Gatti transmission line, to learn of their experiences with the construction of the line and any possible effects that they may have experienced living near the line. Meetings with archaeologists at the Taxila Museum and the Lahore Museum, supplemented by a literature review in the library of the Lahore Museum. These meetings resulted in a programme for an archaeological survey of the three new transmission line corridors. Meetings with electrical engineers of WAPDA and NESPAK to learn about prevailing transmission line planning, construction and maintenance policy and methods in Pakistan. Acquisition and review of original copies of laws pertaining to WAPDA and to transmission lines in Pakistan.
8.2 LEGAL, REGULATORY AND ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORK
8.2.1 Legal Framework in Pakistan By virtue of The West Pakistan Water and Power Development Authority Act, 1958 (West Pakistan Act XXXI of 1958), WAPDA has broad legal authority over "the generation, transmission and distribution of power, and the construction, maintenance and operation of power houses and grids" [Section 8(2)(ii)]. This includes the authority to "frame schemes" for the production and supply of electrical energy, maintain control of such facilities, and "prescribe standards... for the maintenance of power houses and grids" [WAPDA Act, Sections 8(2)(ii), 11(l)(i)(b) and (ii) (b) ]. Act XXXI of 1958 also assigns to WAPDA all the powers and obligations of a licensee under the Electricity Act, 1910. A "licensee" under this Act means any person licensed to supply energy under the Act. This Act obligates licensees to pay compensation for any damages caused during the construction and maintenance of any power distribution facilities [Electricity Act, 1910, Section 13(l)(d), Section 18(4) and Section 19]. The authority to erect transmission lines goes back to The Telegraph Act (XIII of 1885). This authority was extended to WAPDA by the Government of Pakistan Notification No. S.O.II (E)2/5-60, dated June 2, 1961, which has been upheld by the courts. As amended by the Telegraph (Amendment) Act, LXVIII of 1975, Section 10 of the Telegraph Act provides as follows: ",o. Power for telegraph authority to place and maintain telegraph lines and posts: The telegraph authority may place, set up, repair, alter and maintain or cause to be
8.3 placed, set up, repaired, altered and maintained a telegraph line, post or works under, over, along, across or through any land, seashore, road, stream, water or any immovable property, may break, excavate and remove soil to the extent and depth required for placing or removing telegraph line, post or works, and, for the purpose of constructing or maintaining a telegraph line or post, may dig earth, stone and gravel and fell trees:
Provided that (a) ...... (b) the Federal Government shall not acquire any right other than that of user only in the property under, over, along, across, in or upon which the telegraph authority places any telegraph line or post; and
(c) ...... (d) in the exercise of the powers conferred by this section, the telegraph authority shall do as little damage as possible, and, when it has exercised those powers in respect of any property..., shall pay full compensation to all persons interested for any damage sustained by them by reason of the exercise of those powers."
Taken together, the laws governing transmission lines give WAPDA virtually a free hand in the alignment, construction, and maintenance of its high tension transmission lines. The laws neither obligate WAPDA to acquire land for its transmission line towers, nor to pay any kind of easement or user fee to the private landowner. The courts have agreed that WAPDA holds no obligation to private landowners beyond the payment of compensation for damages and have dismissed petitions from private landowners seeking purchase payment or rent for the land under the transmission line towers erected by WAPDA on their land (Wafaqi Mohtasib Secretariat, Complaint No. Reg. I/6402/85).
Actual damage to cultivated land is minimal. Tower designs use deep reinforced concrete footings rather than a full pad under the tower.
Resistance by landowners to the minimal compensation paid for the placing of transmission towers on their land has been growing in parts of Pakistan, particularly in Sindh Province. WAPDA has recently decided to purchase land under transmission towers. As far as damages are concerned, the Telegraph Act, 1885, does not refer to damages to property, but only to "persons interested for any damage." This phrasing precludes WAPDA from being held liable for any damage to the value of land resulting from the
8.4 routing of a transmission line across it. Damages refer to damages to interested persons by reason of the destruction of crops, trees, wells, watercourses, buildings, or other immovable assets due to the construction, presence, and maintenance of a transmission line. The Telegraph Act requires that the telegraph authorities apply to a Magistrate in the event that a tree or trees must be removed for the construction and maintenance of a transmission line [Section 18(1)3. Such a tree or trees cannot be removed until the Magistrate has fixed "such compensation as he sees reasonable...." [Section 18(2)]. WAPDA is responsible for assessing and paying for damages, but landowners have the right to appeal to the "District Judge within whose jurisdiction the property is situated,...". Disputes that can be appealed to a District Judge are those that may arise as to the "sufficiency of the compensation," "the persons entitled to receive compensation or the proportions in which the persons interested are entitled to share in it" [Section 16(3),(4)]. In the past, compensation for damages appears to have been applied unevenly. Clearly, WAPDA assessors have considerable latitude in determining the value of lost or damaged assets. For houses, the rule up to now has been to provide the homeowner with compensation amounting to 25 percent for reusable construction materials and 100 percent for non-reusable materials and estimated labour costs. In the Resettlement Action Plan for the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project, however, WAPDA is proposing to pay the full replacement cost of housing. In rural areas, landowners often are not aware of their right to appeal if they believe damages have not been adequately compensated. In some cases, damages can be severe and long- lasting. Instances have been reported of tubewells under new transmission lines being capped, with minimal compensation being paid.
8.2.2 World Bank Requirements This Environmental Assessment (EA) of the 500 kV transmission lines for the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project has been prepared in accordance with the World Bank's Operational Directive 4.01: Environmental Assessment. Reference has also been made to the chapter entitled "Electric Power Transmission Systems" in the "Environmental Assessment Sourcebook", Volume III (Ref. 8.1). As part of the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project, the transmission line is assumed to be a Category A project (complete EA required).
The Guidelines on Electric Power Transmission Systems were provided by the World Bank to the Water and Power Development Authority (WAPDA) in an Aide Memoire of July 1993, as part of the Bank's review of environmental and resettlement issues in the proposed Project (Attachment 8 of that Aide Memoire, Review of Environment and Resettlement Issues, June/July 1993). These
8.5 guidelines cover potential environmental impacts, effects on land use, health and safety issues, induced development, project alternatives and monitoring. The guidelines deal inconclusively with the question of electromagnetic fields (EMFs), noting that the "scientific community has not reached consensus on specific biological responses to EMFs, but the evidence suggests that health hazards may exist." The guidelines do not provide standards for conductor clearances from residential, educational and/or business structures, or from vegetation or other environmental or socio-economic resources.
8.2.3 Public Health/Safety Standards WAPDA has not issued its own standards to protect public health and safety from potential effects of high voltage transmission systems. In the past, various standards have been used in Pakistan. There is growing awareness, however, that long-term exposure to the EMF effects of high voltage transmission lines could adversely affect the health of those living or working close to such lines. There is particular concern over children studying in schools near high voltage transmission lines. Although the EMF decreases with the square of the distance from the line, neither the specific health effects nor the distance at which such effects pertain over time is adequately understood. Conductor to Ground Clearances
WAPDA has accepted current international standards for conductor to ground clearances for the construction of the Tarbela-Lahore 500 kV Transmission Line Project. The specific standard accepted is that of the National Electrical Safety Code (ANSCI C2) currently applicable in the United States.
As described in the Report of the Tarbela-Lahore 500 kV Transmission Line Project (Ref. 8.3), the conductor to ground clearance "is based on maximum over-voltage due to switching surge. Safe clearance has been kept, considering moving objects under the line with a height of 4.5 m, 3 sigma margin, 99.7% probability to withstand under adverse atmospheric conditions."
Actual conductor clearances (at a maximum temperature of 65°C) are as follows: 1. Cultivated land traversed by vehicles 9.0 m 2. Roads and streets 9.0 m 3. Communication and Power Lines - Power lines up to 132 kV 4.5 m - Power lines up to 220 kV 5.0 m - Power lines up to 500 kV 6.7 m
8.6 4 Highways 11.75 m 5. Railroads 11.75 m 6. Electrified railroad trolley wire 4.5 m 7. River at high flood level 7.0 m 8. Places accessible to pedestrians only 8.0 m 9. Building roofs not accessible to people 6.0 m 10. Building roofs accessible to people 8.0 m 11. Tops of trees (orchards) 6.0 m 12. Canals 9.0 m 13. Lightning protection wires 4.0 m
Corridor Clearances WAPDA follows a policy of 50 m wide corridors for 500 kV transmission lines (25 m out from the centreline). In principle, no residential or other building structure should be within the 50 m wide corridor, although in constricted areas, such as cities, the minimum distance from the centreline can be reduced to 21 m, which gives a minimum horizontal clearance of 12 m fror the outer conductors. Open wells, including Persian wells, are allowed to remain under the high voltage conductors, as are existing orchards, provided the fruit trees are kept under 3 m in height. Farm buildings or single storey factory buildings not used as residences are also allowed to remain under the high voltage lines, provided an 8 m clearance is maintained. The height of the towers can be increased to accommodate existing buildings. Tubewells are not permitted under the high voltage conductors, for fear that piping and cranes used to refurbish such wells could come in contact with the lines. Such wells are, however, permitted within the corridor, although there does not seem to be any rule as to how close tubewells can come to the plumbline of the outer conductor.
8.2.4 WAPDA Transmission Line Organisation
Responsibility for the design, construction and operation of transmission grids in Pakistan comes under the Managing Director, Transmission and Grids (MD/T&G), who reports directly to WAPDA's Member (Power) (Drawing 8.1). Two organisations of interest come under the MD/T&G, each headed by a General Manager. These are Grid Construction and Grid Systems Operations. Grid Construction is divided into four groups, each headed by a Chief Engineer. The four groups are shown on Drawing 8.1. Grid Systems Operations (GSO) also is divided into four groups, each headed by a Chief Engineer. Each group has an area of responsibility, ie GSO, Hyderabad; GSO, Multan; GSO, Lahore; and GSO, Islamabad. Each regional GSO is further subdivided (in descending order) into Circles, headed by a Superintending Engineer; Divisions, headed by an Executive Engineer; and Sub- Divisions, headed by a Sub-Divisional Officer (SDO). The SDO has direct management authority over the Line Superintendents in his
8.7 jurisdiction. At the bottom of the GSO are the Linemen, who patrol the transmission lines and who report to the Line Superintendents. Each patrol team is required to visit its assigned portion of the transmission line to check for "deviations" at least once a month. "Deviations" cover all activities that could threaten the operational efficiency of the transmission system or the health and safety of the public. In the event that a deviation is discovered and not rectified by discussions on the spot, the matter is referred by WAPDA to the local police for prosecution under the Telegraph Act. In most cases, this system appears to work well, although influential persons have on occasion been able to maintain a deviation and avoid prosecution.
8.3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
8.3.1 Terminal Points The three 500 kV lines of the Project will originate at a switchyard near Barotha and extend to the following destinations:
-A switchyard approximately 5 km south of Peshawar. This line will be called the Barotha-Peshawar Line.
- A tower of the existing Tarbela-Gatti Line, near the village of Bolianwal. This line will be called the Tarbela-Barotha Line (or the "In-line").
- A tower of the Tarbela-Gatti Line, near the village of Jabbi. This will be called the Barotha-Gatti Line (or the "Out-line")?
8.3.2 Proposed Routes To reach the points described above, three routes have been selected, after evaluation of various alternatives (see Section 8.5 below). As defined here, these routes represent the centrelines of corridors 50 m wide, within which the placement of towers, hence the final centreline, will be determined by local conditions at the detailed design stage. Barotha-Peshawar Line The proposed line is about 76.8 km long. For convenience of planning, this line has been divided into seven segments (Drawings 8.2 and 8.3). Segment 1, from the Barotha Switchyard to the left (east) bank of the Indus river, is 2.5 km long. Its route is largely governed by the optimal point for crossing the Indus, so that Segment 2 can pass north of Mandori, NWFP.
8.8 Segment 2, 1.0 km long, spans the Indus river, from a low hill on the left bank to a slightly higher one on the right bank, about 500 m north of Mandori.
Segment 3, 21.8 km long, extends from the tower near the Indus to a point 1 km south of the village of Amir. The first 8.4 km of the segment extends approximately west-northwest (Azimuth 290 degrees) and the remaining 14.7 km nearly due west (AZ 275 degrees). Segment 4, 12.2 km long, extends west-southwest across the foothills of the Cherat Range to a point about 500 m north of the village of Qamar Mela. There the line bends about 40 degrees north, beginning the next segment. Segment 5, 16.6 km long, extends approximately west-northwest through a saddle of the Cherat Range and across a portion of the Cherat Cantonment. Segment 6 has a length of 17.8 km and extends a few degrees more westerly than Segment 5 (AZ 280 degrees), crossing the Peshawar- Kohat road about 4 km south of Budbher. Segment 7 is 4.9 km long and extends from a point approximately 300 m west of the Peshawar-Kohat road north-northwest (AZ 350 degrees) to connect with the WAPDA switchyard near Peshawar.
Tarbela-Barotha Line This line (Drawing 8.4) comprises three segments, with a total length of 23.9 km. Its general direction is east-west. Segment 1 extends 500 m southwest from the connection with the existing Tarbela-Gatti 500 kV line. Segment 2, 14.9 km long, is aligned due east-west. It crosses the Haro river about 3 km south of Attock (near village Jassian) and ends in a bend about 300 m west of the Attock-Sher Shah railway line.
Segment 3, extends 8.5 km slightly west of northwest (AZ 300 degrees) from near the railway line to the Barotha switchyard.
Barotha-Gatti Line
This line (Drawing 8.4) comprises six segments, totalling 32.9 km and extending roughly east-southeast from the Barotha switchyard to a connection near Jabbi. Segment 1, 4.8 km long, extends slightly south of southeast from the Barotha switchyard to a point about 500 m north of the Haro river.
8.9 Segment 2, 6.5 km long, extends roughly southeast (AZ 130 degrees) , crosses the Haro, and terminates at a 25 degrees eastward bend near the village of Dheri Longhal. Segment 3, 3.5 km long, extends east-southeast (AZ 105 degrees) across the Attock-Sher Shah railway line and, 500 m farther on, across Nandana Kas (a tributary of the Haro) to a point near the village of Dhok Nawab Khan. Segment 4, 8.6 km long, extends about 10 degrees south of east (AZ 100 degrees) to a point about 1 km south of Akhori. Doing so, it recrosses Nandana Kas. Segment 5, 3.9 km long, lies approximately 20 degrees south of east (AZ 110 degrees) and passes close to the metalled Attock- Fatehjang road. Segment 6 is 5.6 km long and extends about south-southeast (AZ 150 degrees) to the Tarbela-Gatti line 4 km south of Jabbi.
8.3.3 Corridor Treatment WAPDA considers the transmission right-of-way, within which towers are to be placed and safety restrictions apply, to be 50 m wide. Where necessary or desirable, the entire line may be shifted in order to avoid a village, even when the nearest dwelling would be more that the specified minimum distance of 12 m from the vertical plumbline of the outer conductor. WAPDA's policy is to place high voltage lines at least 500 m from a village, where terrain and settlement pattern permit.
Most rural land uses, such as grazing and cropping, are permitted within the right-of-way. Shrubs and trees are restricted, however, since many trees grow high enough to violate the 9 m minimum clearance below the lowest conductor. Where a line must pass through forest, normally the trees are fully cleared. Where the line must pass over an existing orchard, however, the height of the towers is increased to provide sufficient clearance. As discussed above, the construction of buildings within 21 m of the centreline is not permitted and WAPDA maintains a surveillance team which conducts patrols several times each month to ensure that there is no encroachment.
8.3.4 Towers
Except where long spans may be required, eg for crossing the Indus river, two types of towers will be employed in the new transmission lines:
- A 40 m high steel tower (Drawing 8.5), used where the line is straight or nearly so.
8.10 - A 27 m tower (Drawing 8.5) for sites, such as where the line bends, where higher than usual lateral stresses are expected.
Each tower is supported by four footings of reinforced concrete, about 1 to 2 m square and 3 to 6 m long, set into the ground and with about 0.3 m protruding above ground. The tower is prefabricated on site, the parts trucked in and assembled by a crew of 30-40 men. Each tower assembly takes about a day. Three sets of conductors are suspended from a cross-span 25.6 m long in the taller towers and 27.5 m in the shorter towers. From this are strung three sets of four conductors each, attached to the ends of the arms by strips of insulators. The electricity travels around the arm by a hanging loop called a "jumper." The tower design and the stringing of the conductors are such that at a design temperature of 65°C, which would cause a maximum lengthening of the conductors, the clearance at the lowest part of the conductor, including the jumper loop, would be not less than 9 m.
8.3.5 Treatment of the Bypassed Line Section The section of 500 kV line between the tie-in of the Tarbela- Barotha line and that of the Barotha-Gatti line will be removed from service. It has been WAPDA's policy in the past to leave the concrete footings in place unless the land is used for mechanized agriculture and the landowner requests their removal.
8.4 BASELINE CONDITIONS 8.4.1 Land Use Barotha-Peshawar Line Segment 1. This first segment of the line begins in the eroded hills immediately northeast of Barotha and proceeds along the low hills behind the flood plain. From the switchyard to the point north of Dher where the line trends toward the river, the right- of-way (r.o.w.) consists of sparsely brushy slopes and, on the tops of the hills, small plots of barani agriculture. Most of the slopes of these small nullahs are strongly and actively eroded and support only sporadic grasses and shrubs, which are browsed on by goats. The towers in this segment will be placed in the agricultural fields on the tops of the hills. North of Dher the line will pass over largely barani agriculture, passing over a small nullah immediately before the river crossing tower. Segment 2. Most of the r.o.w. in this segment lies on the Indus river and its flood plain, which consists of a mixture of boulders and gravels over a sandy substrate. The tower sites at both sides are in pasture, with low acacia shrubs.
8.11 Segment 3. This long section of line passes over a mixture of barani agricultural land (primarily at the western end), some tubewell irrigation, and pastoral scrubland. In the western portion of the segment the r.o.w. will cross many nullahs and the uplands between them are farmed as barani, apparently discontinuously. The line will pass close to some farmsteads (about 50 m away) but not within 500 m of any villages. Segment 4. This segment passes across the southern foothills of the Cherat range, which are covered with scrub vegetation, containing scattered low trees. There are many wide nullahs. Segment 5. This portion of the route passes across a saddle in the Cherat range and descends through a zone of brush and tufted grass into an area of low foothills. Land use in this area is a mixture of grazing and fuelwood gathering, with intermittent areas of barani agriculture, increasing toward the western end of the segment. About 2 km west of the road leading to Jarobai (near the western end of the segment) the alignment passes through an eucalyptus plantation of about 200 ha. Segment 6. This segment begins slightly west of the eucalyptus plantation and passes through an area of grassland mixed with barani agriculture. After about 5 km it crosses the Upper Warsak Lift Canal (Zangal Canal), the main watercourse of an irrigation system constructed in the 1980s but never put into full service. West of the nullah called Ara Khe Khwan, from Menra to the Peshawar-Kohat road, much of the agriculture is tubewell irrigated and consists of sugarcane, wheat, vegetables and orchard fruit crops.
Approximately 400 in from the western end of the segment, the alignment crosses the Peshawar-Kohat road, which is in process of being upgraded to a divided roadway. On the east side of the crossing the nearly continuous strip development is interrupted by a space about 100 m wide, providing a convenient crossing point for the transmission line. Agriculture in this area is wheat and orchard.
On the west side of the road, the space between buildings is substantially wider than that on the east side, approximately 200 mn, beyond which the line will cross a wheat field. Segment 7. The last 4.9 km leg of this line will pass through level, irrigated agricultural land, without passing close to any settlement.
Tarbela-Barotha Line
Segment 1. From the tie-in of the new line with the existing Tarbela-Gatti line, the first short segment of the new line crosses barani wheat fields. Near its crossing of the metalled road to Bolianwal, the alignment crosses a small nullah.
8.12 Segment 2. Land along this part of the alignment is pasture with few trees, interspersed with areas of cropland, much of it irrigated by tubewells or dug wells. A 4 km section passes near to the Kawah Gar Forest Reserve, an area of low hills containing a scrubby dry forest and shrub community. Despite its protected status, it is a source of fuelwood for rural people.
Approximately 2.5 km from the western end of the segment, the line will span the Haro river. In another kilometre it crosses the Sanjwal-Fatehjang road and, 1.5 km west, the Attock-Sher Shah railway line. This stretch of the line passes over considerable eroded land, with livestock grazing/browsing on sparse vegetation, and small areas of barani cropland.
Segment 3. Beginning just west of the railway line, this segment passes through about 4 km of gullies, interspersed with small areas of barani agriculture on the ridgetops. Six kilometres along the segment, the alignment crosses the Attock-Pindi Gheb road and barani agriculture is slightly more intensive from there to Barotha. The exact routing of the last few kilometres of the line is still under discussion (see Section 8.6, Alternatives). Either route, to the south of the headponds or around to the north, would take the line over land already disturbed by construction.
Barotha-Gatti Line
Segment 1. The first segment of the line, starting at the Barotha switchyard, is subject to the same considerations as the arriving segment of the Tarbela-Barotha line. It passes over land disturbed by construction (and rehabilitated for some designated use), then over barani cropland. It crosses the Dhakner road near the junction of that road with the Attock-Pindi Gheb road or, if the alignment is shifted a few hundred meters to the southwest, it will cross only the latter. It continues over broken land to a point near a bend in the Haro river, where Segment 2 begins. Segment 2. This segment crosses about a kilometre of mixed broken land and upland barani agriculture, and then traverses about 400 m of alluvial barani land on the inside of a large bend in the Haro river. After crossing a gravel bar 200 m wide and the river itself, it follows a tributary stream called Shakardara Kas, which meanders in deeply cut loops. Here it crosses largely agricultural lands, belonging to the village of Dheri Kot, some of which are tubewell irrigated. The remainder of this segment is primarily upland barani agriculture with erosion gullies at intervals. Segment 3. Beginning a kilometre north of Dheri Longhal with a slight bend in the line, this segment traverses the same type of barani land as previously. After 2.2 km it crosses the Attock- Sher Shah railway line and enters an area of eroded nullahs draining into Nandana Kas. It crosses Nandana Kas and a stretch of more nullahs, with open thorn woodland on the hill slopes.
8.13 The segment ends about 500 m southwest of the village of Jawandewali Dhok. Segment 4. This segment crosses barani croplands and pasture, then recrosses Nandana Kas near the village of Nawa. It passes across 5 km of upland barani land and a small tributary of Nandana Kas, called Dunga Kas. It continues across more of the same type of terrain, cut by several nullahs, to end near Akhori. Segment S. The western half of this segment is a mixture of barani cropland and rocky slopes used for browsing (by goats, primarily) and the cutting of fuelwood. The eastern half of the segment is hillier, being an extension of the Kala Chitta foothills, and is mostly covered with open scrub vegetation. There are some barani fields scattered through the section and a small reservoir has been constructed between the road and the transmission line alignment. Segment 6. This last segment of the Barotha-Gatti line crosses an area of broken, rocky terrain dissected by numerous small nullahs. The principal land use is pasture, largely for goats. The area of the proposed tie-in to the existing line is nearly level pasture land.
8.4.2 Ecological Values Barotha-Peshawar Line The barani agricultural lands along the alignment provide habitat for a few species of birds and some small mammals, some of which are agricultural pests. Jackals, foxes, and mongooses are reported to be common and hares (Lepus) were seen during the field visit. In the uncultivated areas adjacent to croplands, the pressure of fuelwood cutting, lopping of limbs for fodder, and livestock foraging has greatly reduced biodiversity and favoured plant species, such as milkweeds (Asclepiadaceae), that are toxic or of low palatability.
The uncultivated slopes of the Cherat range provide more wildlife habitat than the agricultural lands, but the removal of the original forest through centuries of intensive fuelwood and timber cutting, coupled with livestock pressure, has left a dry scrub ecosystem of low vegetative diversity. The lack of biodiversity is well illustrated by the nearly total dominance of the shrub "sanatee" Dodona burmanniana (Myrtaceae) on the southern slopes of the Cherat range.
The situation is not likely to change in the near future. Reafforestation is a government function that inspires little citizen interest in this region. The planting of eucalyptus, a type of tree with little wildlife value outside of Australia, provides some tree cover, but is unlikely to alter the habitat situation.
8.14 Tarbela-Barotha Line The ecological value of lands crossed by this transmission route is similar to that of the Barotha-Peshawar Line, except that the presence of the Indus nearby, and perennial streams and the larger number of nullahs provide greater habitat diversity. This is reflected in the sighting, during the field visit, of numerous bird species not seen in two days along the Barotha-Peshawar line, eg, White-breasted Kingfisher, Common Raven, and Sand Martin at a single large nullah. A considerable number of raptors (eagles, buzzards, harriers, and falcons) were seen at various points in the area. Such species usually are indicative of a relatively rich population of small rodents. Despite the slightly more diverse avifauna, the habitat cannot be rated as suitable for many of these species, since it lacks most of its original natural vegetation and continues to be subject to intensive human activity.
Barotha-Gatti Line The ecological value of the Barotha-Gatti Line is essentially the same as that of comparable areas of the Tarbela-Barotha Line.
8.4.3 Socio-Cultural Resources The region through which the alignments of the three transmission lines pass generally is rural upland country, with largely barani (rain dependent) agriculture on the riverain benches of the Haro, Nandana Kas, and Indus rivers. There are pockets of irrigated agriculture in the Haro valley and the Vale of Peshawar. The cultivated valleys lie between rocky uplands and lines of hills, the latter being forest reserves under the provincial forest departments. The lines pass well south of the main road and rail transportation corridor between Rawalpindi/Islamabad and Peshawar. Apart from specialized defense industries north of the Haro river, the region lacks significant industry. The Barotha- Peshawar Transmission Line skirts south of defense reservations in the Cherat area. Barotha-Peshawar Line Settlement Pattern. The proposed alignment of the Barotha- Peshawar Transmission Line passes through two sub-regions separated by the Cherat hills. The first of these is confined between the Indus and the excessively eroded eastern extension of the Cherat hills. The Indus swings west just below its confluence with the Haro and follows this course for approximately 19 km, before turning south below Nizampur. The Indus thus forms both the eastern and part of the southern border of this sub-region. The southern face of the Cherat hills drains into the Indus through a series of largely seasonal streams between Darwazai and Nizampur. West of Nizampur, the cirque of mountains (Cherat to the north; Khawarra to the west and south) is drained by the Wuoh Khawar.
8.15 The villages in this region either lie at the edge the mountains, where permanent water is available from surface springs (kalapani) or shallow wells, or on the bench above the Indus river along the line where relatively permanent water flows in the streams. The Kohat-Khairabad road generally passes above this second line of villages. Above the lower line of villages, the streams are highly seasonal and dry for most of the year. This is the strip through which the proposed transmission line will pass. The region between the two lines of villages is still largely uninhabited, although there is some residential development on the lateral roads leading up to the higher villages, where tubewells have been sunk to exploit subsurface water. The region is not densely inhabited. Villages occur where water has been available historically, but are nowhere closer to each other than 1.5 km. Most villages between Nizampur and Darwazai are 3 to 7 km apart. Village estates tend to be large, with a central residential site and a few outlying compounds. The Inzari village estate, for example, covers about 25 square miles and lies in a roughly rectangular shape between the mountains and the lower bench above the Indus. Populations vary considerably. According to local informants, smaller villages like Mandori and Darwazai have about 400 households. Inzari, a medium-sized village in population reportedly has between 1,200 and 1,300 households, while the large roadside village of Kah has 4,500 households. The transmission line corridor will pass between the two lines of villages in this area, thus keeping well clear of village sites. Only at Mandori and near Amir will the corridor come within 1 km of the village. According to the WAPDA surveyors, in the 20 km distance between Mandori and Amir, three outlying deras (family compounds) are within the proposed corridor, including one that also has a small shop and private tubewell. In this area, the transmission line will cross over the village roads and elongated village estates roughly at right angles, so that those living in the villages at the foot of the hills will cross under the lines on their way to the lower bazaars, high schools and colleges, and work places. Some local cultivating and livestock movement will also regularly cross under the transmission lines. West of Nizampur, the region becomes much less inhabited. The Wuoh Khawar has permanent flow in the reach from Nizampur to the. Indus, but is dry for most of the year in its middle reaches. Only at Qamar Mela, some 12 km above Nizampur, is there a permanent flow. In this region, the transmission line corridor is routed through uninhabited country and passes 2 km north of Qamar Mela before turning northwestward to climb the Cherat hills over a saddle approximately 1,200 m in elevation.
North of the Cherat Range, drainage flows northwards into the Kabul river and much of the country under the hills is exceedingly broken up and eroded. The route of the transmission
8.16 line passes laterally across this sparsely inhabited submontane region, where a few villages, such as Jarobai, are located near permanent water sources under the hills. The corridor passes about 1 km north of Jarobai (approximately 1,800 households) and 1 km south of the large Afghan refugee camp near Shamshatu. According to informants at the camp, the latter retains less than half of its original population of 20,000 households. Northwest of Shamshatu the topography begins to level off. Here the transmission route crosses a semi-arid plain and passes within a few hundred metres of a small temporary settlement of an estimated 12 housing compounds for Afghan refugees before passing over the non-functional Upper Warsak Lift Canal. Once across the Lift Canal, the corridor enters a fertile, irrigated, and much more densely populated tract about 8 km long, which characterizes the remaining section of the route all the way to its terminus at the WAPDA Grid Station, Peshawar. The settlement pattern here is one of substantial central villages (Anzari, Menra), with numerous outlying compounds scattered throughout the plain. This settlement pattern alters only along the Peshawar-Kohat road, where commercial strip development extends southward past the point where the proposed corridor intersects the road. Ethnic Patterns. The people who inhabit the region of the North- West Frontier Province through which the Barotha-Peshawar transmission line will pass are almost exclusively Pakhtuns (Pathans). The dominant language is Pashto, but literate persons can also speak Urdu. There is only one Awan (Punjabi) village on the right bank of the Indus. This is Jabbi, which is roughly opposite Barotha (not to be confused with Jabba north of Barotha on the left bank, or Jabbi village on the Attock-Fatehjang road). Otherwise the area between Darwazai and Nizampur is the territory of the Akora Khattaks. West of Nizampur along the Wuoh Khawar and its tributaries, there is one village of Kaka Khel Sayyids (at Ziarat Ghalib Gul Baba) and some Dara Adam Khel Afridis, but here too most of the inhabitants are Akora Khattaks. The territory of Hassan Khel section of the Dara Adam Khel Afridis begins about 4 km west of Qamar Mela.
North of the Cherat Range, the inhabitants are more mixed. Akora Khattaks and the Dag Ismail Khel clan share the land in the foothills of the Cherat Range. Farther northwest, around Jarobai and Shamshatu, the area is within the Janikar Ghair Ilaqa (tribal territory), where the people are a more pacified off-shoot of the Dara Adam Khel Afridis. The remaining inhabitants in the Afghan Refugee Camp are mostly Pakhtuns, some of them from around Kunduz and other regions north of the Hindu Kush. The fertile belt southeast of Peshawar is the ancestral territory of the Bara Momands. Economic Base. The sub-regions through which the Barotha- Peshawar line will pass lack uniquely distinguishing economic characteristics. In the main, the rural economy of the Akora Khattak sub-region remains one of largely undeveloped barani
8.17 agriculture, based on rabi wheat and barley, vegetable cultivation and livestock raising for home consumption, with a weak trend toward tubewell irrigation and orchard development. The largest landholdings in the villages visited were 20 ha, with the average being about half that. Fields generally were dispersed and often sectioned by nullahs. Yields for rabi wheat reportedly are poor in the hard pebbly soils. Alluvium and well irrigation are found more often in the villages south of the Nizampur (Khairabad-Kohat) road, where yields are better. The rural economy long ago stopped providing all the requirements for family livelihoods and the area is one of persistent out- migration, with adult males temporarily moving out to take jobs in the military or farther afield in the Gulf. Most households in the sub-region have at least one male working in Khairabad, Akora Khattak, or Nowshera, the last being a medium-sized industrial centre. Some women also move out. Two women from Mandori have become medical doctors and both practice in Peshawar. Education is prized for the skills it can provide to compete for outside opportunities and most villages have at least primary schools for boys and girls. Middle and high schools are within reach of most villages, while degree colleges are available at Akora Khattak, Nowshera, and Peshawar.
Basic health facilities are available in the sub-region, while hospitals in Nowshera and Peshawar are used for serious medical problems. Electricity is supplied throughout most of the region. Many villages also have government-supplied tubewells which are used for domestic water needs. Inzari has a tubewell and tank which supplies an extensive piped household water supply system. West of Nizampur, cultivation is limited to the permanent stream in the Khawar at Qamar Mela. This provides for irrigated wheat and barley cultivation along the stream. The major resource of the village, however, is the "sanatee" bush, which covers the valley bottoms and rolling inter-montane country. Sanatee has been harvested by the villagers for fuelwood from time beyond memory and sold in the bazaars of Nowshera and Peshawar. Local middlemen buy the wood from the villagers for Rs. 40 per 40 kg and sell it in the cities for Rs. 50-55 per 40 kg. They also hire trucks to carry the wood out. An adult can gather up to 80 kgs per day, which translates to Rs. 2,000 per month working a six day week. If women or children or other adults in the family help, a reasonable household livelihood can be had from sanatee. North of the Cherat Range, economic conditions in drier upland country appear to be poorer than those south of the range. More stony upland fields appear to have been abandoned or are now used for pasture. The proximity of major urban areas, like Nowshera and Peshawar, and towns like Pabbi and Akora Khattak, means that more men have daily work outside the village. This area stands in marked contrast, of course, to the contiguous fertile belt of the Bara Momand tract. This area is extensively irrigated from tubewells and produces numerous cash crops: tobacco, sugarcane and sugar beets, vegetables and fruit. Nowshera, which has both
8.18 cigarette factories and sugar mills, is the destination for some of these crops, while vegetables and fruit are sold in Peshawar. Transportation System. The transmission line corridor passes through fairly difficult country that is served by secondary and tertiary road systems. The region skirts south of the main road/railway corridor along the Grand Trunk (GT) road. This corridor is accessible at Khairabad, where the GT road crosses the Indus river, and the Attock Khurd and Akora Khattak railway stations. From Khairabad, a provincial road leads down to a junction west of Khushalgarh on the Rawalpindi-Kohat road. This is the road that goes through Nizampur near the transmission corridor. From this road, most of the villages in the Project area are served by metalled village roads. The more remote areas, like Amir, Mir Kalan, and Qamar Mela, are connected by gravel tracks. The area of the transmission line route north of the Cherat range is served by lateral village roads leading off the Pabbi-Cherat road or directly up from the Grand Trunk road. Most of these village roads are metalled. One district metalled road runs along a bank of the Warsak Lift Canal. This road connects with metalled village roads leading into the Menra and Anzari areas, and with the national Peshawar-Kohat road. The corridor also crosses over the Peshawar-Kohat road, the most important national highway crossed by any of the Project transmission corridors. Archaeological and Historical Resources. The only known archaeological site in the corridor of the Barotha-Peshawar 500 kV Transmission Line is a paleolithic site from the earliest Middle Pleistocene or derived Lower Pleistocene at Mandori. The Mandori site is discussed along with Gariala (Haro-Indus confluence) in the literature as one of the Battered Pre-Soan assemblages of stone tools. The actual location of the find is believed to be in the deeply cut seasonal stream just above Mandori village. A rock with petroglyphs is located about 1 km above Mandori, on the right bank of the Indus. The tower at the western end of the 500 kV crossing of the Indus river will be located on a hillock above and to the north of the Mandori seasonal stream. The top of this hillock is about 50 m above the river and flood bed of the nullah and about 100 m lateral distance from the confluence of the stream and the Indus river.
The most common forms of local cultural property in rural Pakistan are shrines (ziarat) and old village mosques. The most significant shrine in the region transited by the proposed corridor is that of Ghalib Gul Baba near Qamar Mela. The shrine and associated mosque and langar (guest house and kitchen) are 1.7 km from the corridor. Ghalib Gul Baba, a sufi of the Suharwardy Silsila (order), lived during the latter part of the Lodhi Dynasty (9th Century AH, which is approximately the 15th century AD) and was the grandfather of Kaka Sahib, who is buried near Nowshera and is one of the most important saints in the
8.19 North-West Frontier Province. The Ghalib Gul Baba shrine is a handsome domed structure, with some tile work and frescoes in the tomb chamber. It is managed by the local Kaka Khel Sayyids, who claim descent from the saint, and not by the Auqaf Department. A substantial (8 m high) whitewashed structure, the ziarat is visible for miles around, perfectly set in its plain amid the higher ground on three sides. Tarbela-Barotha and Barotha-Gatti Lines The proposed new sections of these lines are aligned in the same sub-region and can be dealt with together. The new section of the Tarbela-Barotha Line will run from Bolianwal near the Sanjwal-Fatehjang road in a westerly direction south of the Haro river, pass between Pindi Trer and the northern margins of the Kawah Gar Reserved Forest, cross the Haro near Jassian and then angle more west-northwest to the switchyard. The new section of the Barotha-Gatti Line will run eastward from the Project switchyard, angle east-southeast over the confluence of the Shakardara Kas and Haro, pass along the southern bench above the Nandana Kas, and join the existing Tarbela-Gatti Line near Jabbi, which is on the Attock-Fatehjang road. Settlement Pattern. Generally in the region of the Haro river and Nandana Kas, the central villages lie on the bench between the river valleys and the mountains (Kala Chitta and Kawah Gar uplands), where relatively flat land is available for barani cultivation. The land along the rivers for the most part is deeply eroded and gullied, while that up toward the mountains is also gullied and stony. These broken areas are used for pasturage, and for fuelwood and fodder. In a few places, where land slopes evenly down to the rivers, fertile pockets irrigated by Persian wells are present, such as at Dhok Machian (Akori village) and around the confluence of the Shakardara Kas with the Haro river (Dheri Kot and Shinh Bagh).
Villages are slightly smaller than those west of the Indus, with populations of between 350 and 900 households. Numerous smaller settlements and family compounds are scattered around the central villages, a substantial portion of these being under the hills where permanent water is available. This pattern suggests conditions of greater security historically in this region east of the Indus. There has been some tubewell development over the past two decades.
Ethnic Divisions. The region to be traversed by the proposed eastern transmission lines is part of Attock District and is inhabited by Punjabi (Potohari dialect) speaking, post-tribal lineage groups (biraderis). The two major lineage groups are those of the Awans, who dominate most of the Potwar Plateau south of the Kala Chitta Range, and the small Khattar Tribe. The latter is confined to the southern belt of Attock Tehsil and the northern margins of Fatehjang Tehsil, but which holds 10 of the 19 villages through which the two transmission lines will pass, including the village of Barotha. Of the remaining 9 villages,
8.20 Awans hold 7 and Sayyids hold 2. Both the Awans and Khattars have contributed substantial numbers of their men to the national defense forces. Economic Base. The economy south of the Haro river is exclusively rural, although the proximity of Attock city and the extensive Kamra/Sanjwal defense industries north of the Haro provide some alternative daily work opportunities for the villages of the area. In addition, virtually every village has members working outside the area in Islamabad, Karachi, or abroad. The village of Jabbi, where the new line from Barotha will tie into the current Tarbela-Gatti Line, is an Awan village with a reported 250 men in the armed forces, police, and other government service. The rural economy is largely barani, with wheat, maize, barley and bajra (fodder) the main crops. There is some irrigated alluvial land in the river valleys and each village now has from one to five tubewells and an average of two tractors. Landholdings are smaller than those across the Indus, ranging from 0.1 ha to 3 ha in one village. Livestock provides an important addition to family incomes and diets. One family with a 0.3 ha holding reported that their annual income from crops was Rs. 12,000-13,000; and from livestock Rs. 6,000-7,000. They regarded this as an average income for their village.
Basic education and medical care are available through village primary and middle schools and Basic Health Units. High schools are present at the Union Council level, while Attock city has a degree college and several private professional schools for commerce and computer studies. More advanced medical assistance also is available in Attock city. Transportation System. Secondary transportation links pass through the area. The Attock-Sher Shah (via Kundian) railway line runs from Attock Junction south across the Haro and Nandana rivers, before passing through the Kala Chitta range. The road to Basal, Pindi Gheb, Talagang and Khushab is routed across the Haro near Gariala. District roads cross the area from Attock city to Fatehjang and from Sanjwal to Fatehjang. Roads north and east of Attock city connect the whole region to the Grand Trunk road at Lawrencepur, Kamra and Haji Shah. Most villages are connected to district roads by metalled roads. Access to the Shakardarra area west of the Nandana Kas-Haro river confluence is still uncertain, as the Nandana has to be forded. Archaeological and Historical Resources. The only known archaeological site near the transmission line corridors is at Gariala, where a group of 17 boulders is marked with petroglyphs. In addition, there are at least two erratics with petroglyphs in the area which were discovered during Project preparation, one each in the estates of Barotha and Dher. Gariala is also the site of a stone age culture from the Early or Middle Pleistocene periods.
8.21 The most prominent contemporary cultural property proximate to the transmission corridors is the shrine of Sakhi Zinda Pir at Akori. This shrine is located on the bank of a deep nullah in the Kala Chitta range about 4 km south of Akhori. A metalled road leads up to the shrine from the district road at Akhori. The corridor of the southern transmission line (Barotha-Gatti) intersects this road about 3 km north of the shrine.
8.5 POTENTIAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
8.5.1 Land Use The overall impacts, mitigation actions and proposals for monitoring the effects of the transmission lines are summarised in Table 8.1. The Project's transmission lines are not expected to cause any significant changes in land use, since WAPDA's policy is to avoid such changes by modifying the line where necessary. Such modifications include the avoidance of villages and, when possible, of single dwellings. Where no alternative to moving a dwelling exists, the site of the dwelling and the new site of the resettled family will undergo minor land use changes (residential to agricultural, and vice versa). Such areas will involve only fractions of hectares.
8.5.2 Vegetation and Wildlife The truck transportation of tower parts and crew (of 30-40 men) to each tower site and the assembly and erection of the tower, as well as the stringing of the wires (initially performed by laying the wires on the ground between the towers) will cause damage to the ecosystem within the narrow confines of the corridor. In all the non-agricultural sections of the lines, the natural vegetation consists of grasses, forbs and shrubs, and is already subject to considerable human pressure. Thus, the transmission line construction will merely place a temporary additional burden on a system already stressed. The linear nature of this impact, both the access to the tower sites and the lines themselves, means that the regeneration of vegetation will proceed more rapidly that in situations such as fire, that may destroy the plants and their seeds over a wider area. In the case of the eucalyptus plantation crossed by the Barotha- Peshawar Line, the trees will have to be felled along the transmission corridor, but the ecological damage done will be nil, since eucalyptus inhibits the growth of many other plants and the plantation cannot really be considered an ecosystem. The absence of most insect pests on this introduced group of trees restricts the use of the plantation by insectivorous birds and mammals.
8.22 8.5.3 Socio-cultural Resources
The transmission lines will have minimal general effects on social and cultural resources in the region, although there could be highly localized effects on houses and other structures. During the process of detailed design and construction of a power line, there is flexibility in selecting the locations of the towers to minimise local impacts. Although the lines will pass over numerous village roads and tracks, several district and provincial roads, one national highway (Peshawar-Kohat road/Indus Highway), and one railway line, no effects on transportation or village agricultural movements are anticipated. Further, none of the lines is likely to induce uncontrolled development in currently underdeveloped regions by introducing electrification, as all will feed into major switchyards that provide power to the national grid. Moreover, local job opportunities on the line will be inconsequential. Towers usually are constructed by specialist WAPDA contractors within a day after the footings are adequately cured. The potential social effects of the transmission lines are as follows: villages
Preliminary surveys and field visits indicate that the proposed corridors will pass well outside the village centres. If necessary, the corridor will be adjusted locally to avoid villages.
At Barotha, the three lines leaving the switchyard have been routed to provide the maximum available clearance from the village, taking into account other features such as the proximity of the Indus river. This clearance is less than WAPDA's target of 500 m but nevertheless is not less than 200 m. Isolated Houses and Inhabited Compounds
Precise figures on the number of dwellings that could be affected will be available after the detailed line surveys have been completed. Preliminary surveys indicate that the proposed corridors of the transmission lines could intercept between 10 and 20 isolated house compounds, which will be relocated locally. Schools
The school at Barotha is adjacent to the fence at the switchyard site, therefore it will be relocated in the resettlement village on the opposite (south) side of the tailrace channel.
The detailed survey of the transmission lines will identify and locate any other schools within 100 m of the proposed corridor alignments.
8.23 Other Buildings
Preliminary surveys and field visits indicate the proposed corridors will intercept several barns, shops, and other non- residential structures. The most affected area will be the crossing of the Peshawar-Kohat road. The detailed survey will note all non-residential buildings within 100 m of the proposed corridor alignments. Where necessary, such buildings will be replaced. Wells The transmission lines will pass over a number of wells, including open Persian wells, pump wells, and tubewells. The most affected area probably will be the passage of the Barotha- Gatti Line over the confluence of the Shakardarra Kas with the Haro river. This is a low area with numerous wells. The detailed survey will note all wells coming within the 50 mn wide proposed corridor of each transmission line. These wells will be replaced by WAPDA as part of the Project. Cultural Properties The transmission lines will pass close to known archaeological sites at Mandori and Barotha. The sites will be noted on the detailed survey after the archaeological survey of the transmission lines has been completed. During the detailed design and construction stage, tower locations will be adjusted to avoid any relevant sites. Temporary Damage: Infrastructure, Crops and Trees
The movement of construction vehicles and line stringing operations could cause temporary damage to local infrastructure (field walls, tracks, lined watercourses, etc.), as well as to standing crops, or to fruit trees. It will not be possible to avoid some damage of this kind, although efforts will be made to minimise such damage and to schedule construction during periods when fields are fallow.
8.6 ALTERNATIVES
8.6.1 No Action Alternative
The "no action" alternative cannot be applied in the case of a transmission line for a project generating electricity, since the generation of power has no utility without the means to convey it to the users.
8.6.2 Terminal Points
Prior to the selection of transmission line routes, the terminal points must be identified. This is done on the basis of the
8.24 national load forecast, predicted future total generating capacity, and transmission capacity. The Power System Analysis Package developed by the Bonneville Power Authority (USA) was used by WAPDA to determine the optimal tie-in points. It takes into account seasonal load fluctuations, transmission line loadability, voltage levels, ambient and conductor temperatures, wind speed, and solar radiation. Based on the results of studies of a number of alternative routes using this package, WAPDA selected Peshawar and a section of the Tarbela-Gatti line as tie-in points for the Ghazi-Barotha Project. Although no specific environmental analysis of the alternatives was done, it is evident that all would exert roughly the same impacts and that none of the impacts would be severe.
8.6.3 Routes Barotha-Peshawar Line On the basis of topography, four alternative routes were considered for this Line (Drawings 8.2 and 8.3). Alternative 1, the northernmost, was preferred initially, because it was predominantly across plains. It would have passed through the military cantonment at Nowshera, however, and, farther west, through an area used for parachute training drops. For these reasons, it was discarded.
Alternative 2 represented a shift to the south, avoiding the militarily sensitive areas of Alternative 1, but this put it in the rugged hills of the Cherat Range, a difficult and costly terrain across which to construct and maintain a line. Alternative 3 was considerably farther south, missing the Cherat Range, for the most part, and passing through more favourable terrain. This route would extend through a tribal area, however, and the security of the line and its workers could not be assured.
Alternative 4, the selected route, is relatively free of topographic problems and appears to exert no serious environmental or social impacts. It passes through sparsely settled plains and foothills, passes at least 3 km from the Manglot Wildlife Reserve, and crosses the southern part of the Cherat Cantonment. The crossing of the cantonment is in an area devoid of residences and other military structures, so permission was readily obtained from the military authorities. Tarbela-Barotha and Barotha-Gatti Lines
While no alternative route has been suggested by WAPDA for the out-line (Barotha-Gatti) arrangement, two alternative routes for the In-line (Tarbela-Barotha) arrangements have been studied
8.25 including the one described above. The other In-line route has been proposed to start from a tower near Ghurghushti. After following a southwest direction up to Sanjwal for 18 km it will turn west towards Barotha for another 18 km. However, this route has not been considered for further study because of the following reasons: - The route would pass through the militarily sensitive areas of Sanjwal and Kamra.
- It would have three crossings over the Power Channel. - It would have one crossing over the GT road, one crossing over the main railway line (Attock-Peshawar) and two crossings over district roads.
- This route would involve construction of about 36 km long In-line and decommissioning of about 35 km section of existing Tarbela-Gatti line. The other alternative route for the In-line arrangement will be about 29 km in length and involve decommissioning of about 15 km length of existing line.
8.6.4 Tower Placement
With the centreline of the route determined on the map, the planning engineer exercises considerable judgement in selecting tower sites in the field. A tower may be shifted along the centreline to obtain clearance, optimal span length, or better foundation conditions. It may be shifted at right angles to the centreline to move the conductors away from a village or residence (often resulting in a shift outside the original map corridor) or to improve the tower site. During detailed design and construction, environmental and engineering conditions will be combined to develop a line that achieves the greatest possible clearance to houses and villages and minimum impact on trees and agriculture.
8.7 MITIGATION PLAN
8.7.1 Variations in Alignment Corridor Clearances On the basis of electro-magnetic flux, WAPDA's practice in routing 500 kV transmission lines complies with international standards. In general, a clearance of 500 m for large settlements and 100 m for isolated public buildings is provided. The absolute minimum clearance for individual buildings is, however, maintained at 21 m from the outermost conductor of a line.
8.26 Barotha Village Due to the proximity of Project facilities around Barotha village, special consideration has been given to determining clearances for transmission line routes leading out of the Power Complex switchyard. The Barotha-Peshawar transmission line will leave the west side of the switchyard and go north in a corridor between the North Headpond embankment to the east and a 500 m arc from the outer limit of Dher village to the west. The Barotha- Peshawar line will continue to the northwest to a tower on the Indus left bank, from which it will cross over to Mandori on the right bank roughly on a line perpendicular to the course of the river (Drawing 8.6). The Tarbela-Barotha and Barotha-Gatti transmission lines will also exit the west side of the switchyard and circumvent Barotha village to the west and south (Drawing 8.6). The lines will then proceed east across the Gariala-Dakhner road, passing to the north of Gariala village. Minimum clearances to housing will be maintained. Due to the proximity of the Indus river, it will not be possible to maintain the preferred 500 m clearance from Barotha village in this sector, but the clearance will be at least 200 m.
8.7.2 Resettlement
In determining the final corridor alignments, including adjustments in the field, WAPDA will make every effort to avoid isolated houses and family compounds by a minimum of 50 m from the plumbline of the outer conductor. In the event that a house or family compound unavoidably comes within a distance of 12 m, the house will be relocated and WAPDA will pay the head of the household the full replacement value of the affected structure. The relocation of housing displaced by the transmission lines will be carried out according to the Resettlement Action Plan (RAP) of the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project (Ref. 8.4). A feature of the RAP is the appointment of an independent Project Non-Government Organisation (PNGO) which will monitor land acquisition and compensation procedures on behalf of Project affectees.
The following caveats will apply:
- The value of the affected structure will be assessed by a WAPDA assessor, but in the event the houseowner does not agree, the village Member of the Union Council (or most recent ex-Member if the council is in legal abeyance) will convene a three-member arbitration panel with representatives from the village elders, WAPDA and the Project NGO (PNGO) to fix the level of compensation. Under the Land Acquisition Act, the houseowner will always have the right to appeal the amount of compensation to the courts.
8.27 Each homeowner will be provided with a Certificate of Compensation which specifies the exact amount of compensation due. The value of the house will include all utility fixtures and other fixed salvageable items. The homeowner will have the exclusive right to salvage and dispose of any material or items from the lost house. The value of these materials will not be deducted from the overall value of the house. The affected household can chose either to build its new home, or have WAPDA provide a house of the same size. In the event that the affected houseowner does not own suitable land on which to resettle, WAPDA will purchase land near the village for the new house. This plot will be either the same size as the lost site or 46 sq m, whichever is larger. If necessary, WAPDA will provide a truck to enable the affected family to move to the new house.
The move to the new house must be completed before the 500 kV line is energised.
Each owner of a house to be demolished and who wishes to build his own replacement will be paid for the new house in five equal installments, starting with (1) an initial advance payment, with subsequent payments being made on (2) completion of foundations, (3) completion of masonry work, (4) completion of the roof, and (5) after moving into the new dwelling. All payments will be made within one week of the PNGO certifying that the necessary stage has been completed. The target date for the completion of each stage will be agreed between the owner, WAPDA, and the PNGO, and should be recorded in the Certificate of Compensation. If the delay reaches 3 months at any stage, WAPDA will have the right to complete the construction at the owner's cost. This is to ensure that the affectees do in fact move into their new dwellings and that delays do not affect the construction of the transmission lines.
At Barotha, the households adjacent to (within 12 m) the fence just south of the switchyard will be given the option of moving to the resettlement village. This move will occur as part of the Resettlement Action Plan for the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project.
8.7.3 Schools
The final alignment of the transmission line corridors will maintain an horizontal clearance of 100 n between the outer conductor and any school building. The school at Barotha, which is close to the switchyard, will be moved to the resettlement
8.28 village. Any other school that unavoidably comes within 100 m of the outer conductor on any of the Project transmission lines will be moved at Project expense to an appropriate nearby location.
8.7.4 Other Buildings Clearances for non-residential buildings, other than schools, will be treated according to the standards of the National Electrical Safety Code (ANSCI C2). Every effort will be made to avoid these buildings by adjusting the locations of towers or, where practicable, to heighten towers to maintain the vertical clearances. If, in the event, any buildings cannot be avoided, the owners will be paid compensation at replacement value by WAPDA.
8.7.5 Wells Open wells served by the traditional (Persian Wheel) lift system will continue to 'function if these come under the 500 kV lines. Pumpwells and tubewells, however, that unavoidably come directly under the transmission lines or within 12 m of the plumbline of the outer conductor will be capped by WAPDA. This is to prevent accidental contact or arcing with the lines by pipes and cranes when pumpwells or tubewells are reconditioned. For all wells that are capped, the Project will provide replacement wells of the same capacity and any associated irrigation infrastructure (e.g. lined watercourses) free of cost to the affected wellowner. The new tubewell will be placed as close as possible to the old well, but preferably outside the 50 m corridor. If the tubewell owner (or owners in the case of jointly-held tubewells) does not own the land in an appropriate and agreed location, the Project will purchase a site for the well and any connecting strip to the owner's present holding.
8.7.6 Bypassed Section
The section of the current Tarbela-Gatti Line between the tie-in points of the two new transmission lines east of Barotha will be dismantled. In cultivated ground, the concrete tower footings will not be left as they are. WAPDA will either remove these footings entirely or remove the top part of the footings down to 0.75 m below the top of the soil.
8.7.7 Cultural Properties
Archaeological sites will be safeguarded from any direct impact by the transmission lines. These sites will be noted on Project maps by the Archaeological Survey team. The recommendations of the archaeologists about how these sites should be treated under the Project will be followed.
8.29 The Department of Archaeology will be notified when the transmission tower sites have been determined. The Department may wish to visit certain sites to ensure that they do not contain any cultural properties. If archaeological or historical resources are found, the Department may require salvage, preservation, or a change in tower site.
8.7.8 Temporary Damage WAPDA will pay for all damage to crops, fruit trees, and local infrastructure (field walls, tracks, lined watercourses, etc). Such payments will be made within one month after an assessment of damage by WAPDA assessors. In the event that the owner of the damaged property believes the compensation is too low, the same procedure described in Section 8.7.2 will apply. WAPDA will pay the compensation within one month of the decision of the arbitration panel. The PNGO will record the decision of the panel and ensure that the payment is made. It will note such payments, or lack thereof, as part of its regular reporting requirements.
8.8 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
8.8.1 Management Responsibility The management of social aspects of the Mitigation Plan will be the responsibility of the Project Non-Governmental Organization (PNGO) of the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project. The WAPDA Transmission Line Cell and/or its consultants will provide both the PNGO and the WAPDA Environmental Cell with the precise numbers, physical details, and locations of all affected sites in the proposed transmission line corridors.
For each affected site, the Transmission Line Cell and/or its consultants will show that there is no local solution to the effect and the impact is unavoidable. A combined field visit (Transmission Line Cell and/or consultants, the PNGO, and the WAPDA Environmental Cell) will be made to examine unavoidably impacted sites (houses, schools, wells, cultural properties, etc.) Where impacts are unavoidable, the PNGO will ensure that the relocation of houses is carried out according to the Mitigation Plan (above) and, as appropriate, the requirements for relocation housing provided for in the Project Resettlement Action Plan.
The PNGO also will work with the appropriate WAPDA assessment staff, contractor, and civil authorities to ensure that schools requiring relocation are moved. It will work with the WAPDA assessment staff and contractor to ensure that all replacement wells are constructed and handed over to their owners in complete
8.30 working order, together with any infrastructure requiring reconstruction (pipes, watercourses, nakkas, etc.). The PNGO will report on the status of mitigation activities in the transmission line corridors as part of its regular reporting requirements for the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Prxoject. It will also certify that planned mitigation activities have been completed, so that the process of energising the 500 kV lines can begin. The WAPDA Environmental Cell will be responsible for checking the clearances of all structures along the corridor, including non- residential buildings. It will also ensure that the protection requirements for the archaeological sites will be carried out.
8.8.2 Implementation Issues It is a general practice that WAPDA identifies a tentative route for a transmission line on the basis of a preliminary survey, and prepares bid documents accordingly. The detailed survey for the design of the route and positioning of the towers is carried out by specialist contractors who are engaged for the construction of that transmission line. WAPDA will meet that its social and environmental obligations by ensuring that the following steps will be complied with:
- The survey will include detailed information about all villages within 500 m of the proposed corridor, all houses and residential compounds coming within the proposed corridor, all schools within 100 m of the corridor, and all tubewells/pumpwells or other infrastructure coming within the proposed corridor. The results of the detailed survey will be made available to the Department of Archaeology and the Project NGO. As part of the detailed design process, alignments and tower locations will be adjusted locally as necessary and as may be possible to avoid buildings or other features. The adjustment will be recorded.
WAPDA and/or its consultants, together with the Project NGO, will attempt to find local solutions to any remaining corridor clearance problems so as to avoid or minimise any direct impact on villages, houses and schools.
For those structures unavoidably within the proposed corridor, or having inadequate clearances from the outer conductor of the 500 kV line, the process of valuing structures and selecting relocation sites will be completed prior to the start of tower construction. All rolocations will be completed before the process of energising the transmission line in the field begins.
0 on 8.9 MONITORING PLAN The Environmental Monitoring Plan for the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project will be carried out by the WAPDA Environmental Cell, with the assistance of the Project Monitoring Consultants for the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project. The Environmental Cell will review the Monitoring Plan, together with specific data on social impacts (houses and schools, wells, cultural properties) from the detailed alignment survey. It will conduct a field examination of all unavoidably affected sites prior to the initiation of transmission line construction. The Environmental Cell will monitor the implementation of the Mitigation Plan. A representative of the Cell will be present during the turnover to the owners of all relocated houses and all other reconstructed properties, including schools, tubewells and pumpwells. In addition, a representative of the Environmental Cell will be present during the construction of transmission lines near all archaeological sites within the corridor. The Environmental Cell will include information on its monitoring of the transmission lines as part of its regular reporting requirements under the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project.
REFERENCES
8.1 World Bank, Environmental Assessment Sourcebook, Volumes I,II, and III, World Bank Tech. Papers 139, 140, and 154, 1991. 8.2 Gessinger, Laurie G., Patti Waller, Vernon L. Chartier, and Robert G. Olsen; Electric and Magnetic Field Reduction and Research: A Report to the Washington State Legislature, Proc. Amer. Power Conf., pp.1674-1679, 1993. 8.3 WAPDA (Pakistan Water and Power Development Authority); Tarbela-Lahore 500 kV Transmission Line Project: Manual of Construction Operation and Maintenance, NESPAK (Joint Venture with ACE and FACE), 1992. 8.4 WAPDA (Pakistan Water and Power Development Authority); Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project, Resettlement Action Plan, April 1994.
R.32 APPENDIX 8-A
REPORT PREPARERS AND PERSONS CONTACTED
Pakistan Hydro Consultants
Dr. Peter L. Ames, Lead Environmental Scientist
Mr. Anis A. Chaudry, Principal Environmental Scientist
Dr. Philip E. Jones, Social Scientist
Mr. I. R. Mufti, Social Scientist
Mr. Iftikhar Khalil, Project Manager
Mr. Clive Baker, Senior Deputy Project Manager
Mr. Ashraf Akhtar, Deputy Project Manager
Persons Consulted
Engr. Haneefullah Khan, Superintending Engineer, Ghazi- Barotha Hydropower Project, Tarbela
Engr. Saifullah Wazir, Superintending Engineer, EHV T/L Constr. Circle, WAPDA
Engr. M. Khalid Iqbal, Principal Engineer, NESPAK
Engr. Zahid Liquat, Senior Engineer, NESPAK
Mr. Muhammad Yousef, Assistant Curator, Taxila Museum
Dr. Anjum Rehmani, Director, Lahore Museum
Ms. Humera Alam, Curator, Lahore Museum
Q - -1 TABLE 8.1
IMPACTS, MITIGATION AND MONITORING - TRANSMISSION LINES
RESOURCE IMPACT MITIGATION ACTION MONITORING
Residences Line clearances Relocationof Facilityor Detailed Line Surveyof WAPDAEnvironmental Schools insufficient Realignmentof Line - Row & CPL of Towers to be Cell (latterpreferred) marked by WAPDA Census by WAPDA& PNGO of all Villageswithin 500 m Houses 50 m School loom Hosp/Dis 100 m Other bldgs " Row Wells (by type) Row Cultural Row properties
Archaeological Line clearances Recoveryof site artifactsor WAPDAEnvironmental sites insufficient Realignmentof line - Cell (latterpreferred) CHAPTER 9
ACCESS ROAD FOR BAROTHA POWER COMPLEX CHAPTER 9
ACCESS ROAD FOR BAROTHA POWER COMPLEX
9.1 INTRODUCTION
9.1.1 Project Background The history and status of the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project are briefly described in Chapter 1 of this Supplementary Report. At the time of the feasibility environmental studies (1990) and the first round of supplementary studies (1991), the access road to the Barotha power complex area was identified only conceptually, and planning was not sufficiently advanced to permit environmental impact assessment. This fact was noted by the World Bank's Environmental Resettlement Review Panel in the Bank's Aide Memoire of June/July 1993 and the present study was initiated.
9.1.2 Legal, Regulatory and Administrative Framework Pakistan Requirements The Ministry of Environment and Urban Affairs, Government of Pakistan, has issued environmental guidelines on rural roads in its "Environmental Impact Assessment Guidelines" (Ref. 9.1). These guidelines largely parallel those of the World Bank, discussed below, but pay particular attention to effects of road construction and use on water resources, drainage, erosion, and siltation. The guidelines recognise potential socio-economic effects of roads, including land use changes. The guidelines can be used as a checklist of specific impacts during the design, construction, and operational phases of a road project. World Bank Requirements and Guidelines World Bank guidelines on roads and highways are set out in the World Bank "Environmental Assessment Sourcebook," Vol II (Ref. 9.2). The Bank recognises the socioeconomic benefits provided by road and highway projects, but notes a broad range of potential environmental impacts. These include effects resulting from permanent alterations of physical environments, such as changes in drainage, loss of vegetative cover, pollution, erosion, spillage of hazardous materials, as well as construction period effects. The guidelines also note potential socioeconomic effects, including the impact of outside workforces, induced development, and the loss of agricultural land.
National standards for Road Design The National Highway Authority maintains standards for the design of all classes of roads in Pakistan. Any authority wishing to construct a road, whether this be a local government authority
9.1 (District Council, Municipal Corporation), provincial authority, or autonomous body (WAPDA), is required by law to conform to government standards for road design.
WAPDA Design Group The construction of an access road to Barotha was recommended by Pakistan Hydro Consultants and a route was selected which follows an old Sarkari (government) road as the traceline for the new road. The design of the new road is being undertaken by the Central Design Office (CDO) of WAPDA, at the request of the Chief Engineer and Project Director, Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project. Once the CDO design has been approved, WAPDA will initiate the process of land acquisition, bidding and contracting for road construction.
9.1.3 Status of Road Planning and Design
At the time this environmental assessment was prepared (April 1994), the terminal points and route of the access road had been established and a survey of the route had been done. Field marker posts were set by the surveyors along the centreline of the route. Design dimensions had been established, as described in Section 9.2.3, but some details were still under discussion. The details of the bridge design had not been established.
Surveys of land use and tenure were yet to be performed. The precise limits of the government r.o.w. for the Old Sarkari road were yet to be determined, as part of the complex process of determining land ownership for budgetary and compensation purposes. Before construction takes place, however, WAPDA will have completed acquisition of the land, including payment to those whose land will be acquired for the road.
9.1.4 Approach to the Study This environmental assessment was conducted in the Lahore offices of Pakistan Hydro Consultants (PHC) and in the field in November 1993, and April 1994, by a team consisting of two senior environmental scientists and two rural social scientists.
Early in the assessment process the team evaluated the access road in terms of the World Bank's environmental categories, defined in Operational Directive 4.01. Briefly, this directive establishes three categories of projects on the basis of anticipated environmental effects:
- Category A projects are expected to exert substantial environmental effects and require a comprehensive environmental study. The Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project clearly falls in this group.
9.2 Category B comprises projects expected to cause only limited environmental impacts, for which a less comprehensive EA is appropriate. Category C projects are expected to exert no significant environmental impact, and therefore require no EA.
Although the Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project is considered to be in Category A, necessitating extremely comprehensive environmental studies, the access road can reasonably be placed in Category B, for the following reasons:
- It is a small unit (7.2 km long) structurally independent from the rest of the Project.
- It will not cross any areas of natural habitat; the area is used for barani (rain-fed) agriculture and stubble grazing. = There are no dwellings or other structures within or adjacent to the right-of-way, except for the main railway line which crosses the proposed alignment.
- The road will not cross any waterways. = There are no known archaeological sites along the route and the area has a long history of soil disturbance.
- The road will require only minor amounts of fill and will not generate any spoil.
For these reasons, the Consultants' team felt it appropriate to perform the field studies at the reconnaissance level, omitting quantitative sampling and extensive field interviews.
9.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
9.2.1 Objective
The objective of the Project access road is to provide a route for the transportation of heavy equipment and construction materials from the main highway to the Barotha Power Complex site, a distance of 7.2 km, in such a way as to avoid hindering or being hindered by other traffic in the area. This road will allow the construction traffic to bypass Attock city, where the roads are narrow and congested.
9.2.2 Route The proposed new road (Drawing 9.1) will connect the Attock-Haji Shah road with the Power Complex site. Its general orientation
9) 3 will be northeast-southwest. Its northeast terminus will be on the Attock-Haji Shah road, approximately 7 km south of Haji Shah, and its southwestern terminus at the Dhakner road, where it will link up with the network of roads within the construction site. The new road will follow a centuries old dirt road, known as the Old Sarkari road, that is largely on government owned land, obviating the need for extensive land acquisition for the right- of-way. The existing road follows a barely perceptible ridge largely above 370 m in elevation. Three kilometres from the Attock-Haji Shah road, the new route crosses the Attock-Peshawar railway line, which it will do on a bridge.
9.2.3 Road Design The new road will be a two-lane, metalled (asphalt) road, with each lane 3.3 m wide. The shoulders will be of compacted gravel 1.8 m wide on each side. The right-of-way (r.o.w.) will extend 10 m farther on each side, giving it a total width of 30.2 m. The extra .strip of land on both sides has been included to accommodate slopes where the road is in fill and provision of a drainage ditch. This will also act as a borrow area for the maintenance of the road berms and for the planting of trees to form a green belt similar to that on the WAPDA road from Lawrencepur to Tarbela. The road will contain one bridge, where it crosses the Attock- Peshawar railway line, at the highest point of the ridge. This will be a level, reinforced concrete structure, 28 m long and 11 m wide. It will have a clearance over the track of 7.2 m. In order to allow for the planned expansion of this railway line to two tracks, the bridge will include the additional space for a second track, adjacent to the existing one.
Pakistan Railways will be consulted to determine whether the second track will be placed on the east or the west of the present one.
9.3 BASELINE CONDITIONS 9.3.1 Land Use
The centreline of the selected route follows a road that dates from the mid-19th century or earlier. The Old Sarkari road is an unpaved, unimproved track 2.5 to 4 m wide, mostly at about the same level as the surrounding terrain, in places a metre or two lower.
Land use along the alignment is almost entirely agricultural. Barani (rain-fed) fields extend to the edge of the existing road throughout its length. The access road will depart from the old
9-4 right-of-way for approximately 800 m to remove a sharp bend in the old road. It also will depart briefly from the old route to reach the new bridge over the railway.
9.3.2 Ecological Values The barani agricultural fields of the region represent an artificial ecosystem that supports a few species of small birds (larks, shrikes, mynahs) able to nest on the ground or in the scattered small trees. Rodents and rabbits evidently flourish in this habitat, for a high density of raptors were noted along the route during the field visit, mostly winter visitors (eagles, buzzards, harriers, kestrels). The lack of large trees or cliffs means that any of these species inclined to nest would be unable to do so, even though the food might be available.
9.3.3 Socio-cultural Conditions The construction of the planned 7.2 km Haji Shah-Barotha access road will amount to the widening of an old government road (Sarkari Rasta) that runs along the gently undulating high ground between the nullahs draining westward into the Indus river (eg Jabba nullah) and those draining southward into the Haro river (eg Sarwala nullah). North and east of the junction of the access road with the current Haji Shah-Attock road, the land slopes northward downstream toward the Chel river to the north. The immediate area of the Old Sarkari road constitutes a waterless tract of barani agriculture, with field boundaries marked by low stone walls, thorn hedges and a few zizyphus trees. The description in the Settlement Report of 1886-1887 still seems accurate:
"Immediately south of this region [Chhachh] we come to a very inferior tract, south of the Attock hills and north of the Chitta Pahar, known as Sarwala and as the "Maira" tract, with light soil and rock near the surface, hot, poor, and scantily populated (p. 3)."
Settlement Pattern The area traversed by the proposed road is uninhabited, but constitutes the dry upland area encompassing the estates of five villages. The villages themselves are lower down along the nullahs, where permanent water is available in the nullah beds or in wells dug down into the relatively shallow bed flows. The five villages whose land will be affected by the proposed road widening are as follows:
Haji Shah is a large village built on a natural terrace above the Chel river and below the northeastern corner of the Attock hills. A long-inhabited site, the village estate encompasses the watershed of the Haji Shah Nullah, a permanent stream that drains the eastern face of the
9.5 Attock hills and the northern slope of the high ground between Attock city and the Grand Trunk road. The downstream bed of the nullah and the lower ground along the Chel are dotted with old Persian wells and more recent tubewells, which provide water for double- cropping. Both the Grand Trunk road and the Haji Shah- Attock city road pass through the village boundaries and the crossroads is a site of considerable strip development. Largely owned by Sheikhs and Pirachas, Haji Shah had a population of 6,802 in the 1981 Census. Its current estimated population is estimated at 8,500 to 9,000 people. Sarwala is the large Awan village west of Attock city which has given its name to the Sarwala Revenue Circle and to the region generally. Located on the western bank of the Sarwala Nullah, the village largely has become incorporated into the western suburbs of Attock city. Permanent water is available in the nullah about 1.5 km upstream from Sarwala and then flows south into the Haro river. Numerous wells along the nullah bed provide for localised irrigated agriculture for about 2 km upstream and 1 km downstream from the village site. The village estate lies along the western side of the nullah, from its confluence with the Haro northward to the watershed along the hump of high ground between Attock city and Haji Shah. The village boundary touches that of Haji Shah along this watershed. The village had a population of 5,096 in the 1981 Census. The current population is estimated at 6,500 to 7,000 people. Shakar Dara is a Khattar village located on the eastern bank of the Sarwala nullah roughly opposite Sarwala. Like the latter, Shakar Dara largely has been incorporated into the western suburbs of Attock city. Indeed, much of its eastern extension is now urbanised. Wells in the nullah bed also provide Shakar Dara with irrigation in and around the village site. The village boundaries extend northward from the Attock-Gariala road along the eastern bank of the nullah to the high ground north of Attock city. The village had a population of 4,194 in the 1981 Census. The current population is about 5,500 people. Surg Salar is an extensive Khattar village. Its lands reach from the boundary of the Kala Chitta reserved Forest to the south, across the Haro river and northward to the hump of high ground, where its boundary meets those of Nurpur Karmalia and faji Shah. The totaL length of this strip is about 16 km. In its section north of the Haro, the village is bounded by Sarwala on the east and Chhoi Gariala on the west. Surg Salar has two settlement sites, Surg, which is on the bench south of the Haro and under the Kala Chitta mountains, and Salar, which is on the north bank of the HIaro river. The Salar
9.6 nullah joins the Haro west of Salar. This nullah has permanent flow several kilometres upstream from the confluence and provides for wells and local irrigated agriculture both at Salar and upstream at Dhok Haji Ahmad, where the nullah crosses the Attock-Gariala road. Above Dhok Haji Ahmad, the village estate lies in the dry upland tract along the old Sarkari road. The village had a population of 3,162 in the 1981 Census. The current population is estimated at 4,000 to 4,500 people.
- Chhoi Gariala is an Awan village that, like Surg Salar, is located on both sides of the Haro river. The village settlement is on the high north bank of the Haro, about 1.5 km west of the Attock-Gariala-Pindi Gheb road and 2.5 km east of the confluence of the Haro and Indus rivers. Most of the village estate is south of the proposed access road. There is, however, a thin strip of village land that lies between Surg Salar and Barotha and which also touches the boundaries of Dher and Nurpur Karmalia. The village had a population of 1,695 in the 1981 census. The current population is estimated at 2,100 to 2,300 people. Economic Base
The agrarian economy of the Sarwala region remains poor. Wells and checkdams in the nullah and river beds permit highly localised irrigated agriculture (chahi) on small plots, usually around the village settlements. Here there is double cropping, with wheat as the main rabi crop and maize the main kharif crop. Fodder can be grown year round on land irrigated by wells, and there is some development of woodlots and fruit orchards, although these are highly restricted to settlement sites. The great bulk of land in the region is barani, cropped with winter wheat (rabi) and some mustard, the latter for oil seeds and fodder. Increasingly, if spring rains have occurred, the kharif season is devoted to the cultivation of groundnuts and gram, both cash crops.
As in other parts of the region, the agrarian sector of the economy remains relatively stagnant, while a growing industrial sector absorbs more local workers. The agrarian sector has not provided a sufficient livelihood for the region's growing population for many decades. The defense forces have recruited from the area for well over a century and young men have been leaving for work in distant cities, or even abroad, for almost as long. The arrival of significant industrial infrastructure in the region, including Lawrencepur Woollen Mills, the Kamra Aeronautical Complex, and the Sanjwal Ordnance Factories, has given the area considerable economic uplift, providing both direct and spin-off job opportunities for local people.
Attock city is growing steadily, though not rapidly. It had a population of 26,233 in the 1981 Census, but may have between 33,000 to 38,000 people today. As a district headquarters and
0 7 cantonment town, the city provides the region with a wide range of medical, educational, commercial and professional services. Medical and educational services are both public and private. Hospitals can handle all but the most severe problems, which are then referred to Abbottabad or Rawalpindi. Students can study at degree level at the government college in Attock and pursue training in a variety of fields, including commerce, computers and applied engineering. Transportation Network The region around Attock city is on Pakistan's major transportation routes. The main Karachi-Peshawar railway line passes through Attock city. This line runs north-northwest and northwest from Attock city Junction toward Peshawar and crosses the Old Sarkari road about 5.5 km from the Attock railway station. A branch line from Attock city Junction runs south through the Kala Chitta mountains to Sher Shah in southern Punjab. Trains from Peshawar to Multan and vice versa use this route.
Attock city is 11 km south of the Grand Trunk road, to which it is connected by roads to Kamra and Haji Shah. These roads are heavily travelled by passenger and goods vehicles. Provincial roads connect Attock with Fatehjang and Pindi Gheb, each carrying frequent passenger and goods traffic. In the area of the proposed access road, a district road connects Gariala Chowk with Attock Khurd. Metalled village roads connect this road with the villages along the Indus bench, including Barotha. Traffic on these roads is not frequent and each village has from three to five passenger trucks visiting it daily. Several unimproved village tracks cross the Old Sarkari road. The most important of these is the track between Sarwala and Dakhner, which is a faster route during good weather than the longer way around via Gariala Chowk. This and other tracks are used by passenger pick-up trucks, farm vehicles and goods trucks. Archaeological and Historical Resources
There are no known archaeological sites in the immediate vicinity of the proposed access road alignment, although this will be confirmed by an archaeological survey. The surrounding area does, however, have important sites. These include Early to Middle Pleistocene paleolithic sites at Gariala and near Mandori. In addition, petroglyphs have been found at Gariala and, during Project preparation, at Barotha and Dher. The archaeological survey for the Ghazi Barotha Hydropower Project found evidence of a stone age culture at Dakhner (Refs. 9.3 and 9.4). Gandharan remains have been found at Mansar, Haji Shah and Kamra, while several mounds near Musa Khudlathi were identified as probable Kushana sites during Project preparation and by the Project archaeological survey. Near Haji Shah there are an old well and stone carving, both with Devanagri characters, suggesting possible Hindu Shahi origin. Haji Shah also has an
O0Q old well possibly dating from the construction of the Grand Trunk road by Sher Shah Suri (16th Century). This well may be one in a series dug at staging places along the road. There is another old staging well at Hattian, some 10 km to the east along the road (Refs. 9.4 and 9.5).
9.4 POTENTIAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
9.4.1 General The principal impacts of the new road, mitigation actions and proposals for monitoring are sumarised in Table 9.1.
9.4.2 Land Use
The new road will have a very slight direct effect on land use, limited to the conversion of the following areas of barani agriculture to road right-of-way, which will include pavement, shoulders, drainage ditch and the vegetated areas.
- A 6.4 km long strip, more or less parallel to the first and outside the existing r.o.w., where land will be acquired to develop the required 30.2 m width of r.o.w. This strip will total about 17.3 ha in area.
- A new strip of right-of-way, approximately 800 m long and 30.2 m wide, where the proposed route departs from the Old Sarkari road to eliminate a sharp bend. This will amount to about 2.4 ha.
- Areas along the sides of the Dhakner road and the Attock-Haji Shah road where these roads will be widened by 3.5 m to provide a turning lane for trucks entering the access road. These are expected to total less than 0.1 ha. The new r.o.w. will total 21.9 ha. Of this area, the total amount of land changing from agriculture to road right-of-way will be approximately 19.8 ha. The new road will utilize the r.o.w. of the Old Sarkari road for 6.4 km, the average width of which is only about 3.2 m, giving a nominal area of 2.1 ha.
In addition, land will be required temporarily for construction areas, as required by the contractor, outside the new r.o.w. These are expected to be near the terminal points, and on both sides of the railroad for bridge construction. This land will be leased from its owners and returned upon completion of the access road. The total area used will be about 0.1 ha.
9.9 9.4.3 Ecological Impacts The conversion of 19.8 ha of barani agriculture to roadway will not be a significant ecological change, in view of the limited ecological value of the existing croplands.
9.4.4 Socio-cultural Resources Resettlement No resettlement will be required as the access road will not displace any housing. Loss of Agricultural Land The most significant impact of the proposed Haji Shah-Barotha access road on local socio-cultural resources will be the loss of agricultural land. The amount of land to be lost by each village is as follows: VILLAGE PRIVATE GOVERNMENT TOTAL LAND (ha) LAND (ha) (ha)
Haji Shah 1.0 0.1 1.1 Sarwala 2.1 0.2 2.3 Shakar Dara 2.2 0.1 2.3 Surg Salar 12.9 1.7 14.6 Chhoi Gariala 1.6 - 1.6
TOTAL 19.8 2.1 21.9 This data has been abstracted from Village Land Records (Jamabandi), as recorded by the WAPDA Land Assessment Staff, Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project, Tarbela. The impact of the loss of agricultural land on household livelihoods and village economic resources is limited by the following factors:
The land is relatively poor, with unproductive soils and dependent on rain. In every case, it is the most distant part of the estate from the village habitation site and the least valuable of the cultivated land.
The losses to livestock will be minimal. Most villagers do pasture their livestock on stubble remaining in the fields after harvest, and on grasses in the field boundaries, but the main sources of fodder are grasses and bushes in the uncultivable land in the eroded nullahs and from fodder grown on irrigated land. With the exception of Surg Salar, relatively small areas are being taken. The figures do not reflect those minor
9.10 areas where farmers have illegally encroached on the Old Sarkari road.
- The Old Sarkari road already largely delimits village boundaries in the area, as well as field boundaries. Thus, the access road will not generally cut across the existing field system or carve a new road across village estates. The two exceptions to this will be near the Dakhner track crossing and the curve near Barotha, where some six fields may have to be crossed to straighten out a sharp bend on the access road.
- In every case the land being taken is fragmented into small holdings, often with multiple shareholders (hissadars). This is the result of inheritance laws operating over many generations, so that the average landholding in the area to be taken is 0.02 ha. Many of these landowners and hissadars are working outside the village, and some of those remaining in the village no longer depend solely on the land for their household incomes. The decline of land as the only source of income and the pattern of multiple ownership suggests that the impact of the land taking will be dispersed over many households, rather than severely impacting a few. Induced Development Road development always raises the potential for induced development. In Pakistan, this usually has meant uncontrolled or unzoned strip development along roads. WAPDA has a good record of controlling development along its roads. The WAPDA-owned section of the Lawrencepur-Tarbela road, for example, has not been affected by strip development. Like the proposed access road, this road runs through the higher margins of local village estates. Given the distance of the proposed access road to the village habitation sites, it is doubtful that there will be much pressure for commercial development along the road. By itself, some strip development is not necessarily an unwelcome effect. Roadside bazaars provide an economic outlet to contiguous villages and job opportunities to villagers. This is particularly the case for the artisans and landless field labourers in the villages. In the wider Project area, artisans have been particularly effective in transferring their traditional occupational skills into new occupational categories as mechanics, tractor drivers, lathe operators, etc. The problem with bazaars along the roads is the lack of rational planning and the absence of services such as effective waste management.
9. 11 9.5 ALTERNATIVES CONSIDERED 9.5.1 No Action Alternative
If the access road is not constructed, heavy vehicles hauling construction equipment and materials to the Power Complex will have to use the existing road network and pass through the narrow and congested roads within Attock city. Depending on the origin or destination of the cargo, trucks would use the smaller rural roads, such as the Attock-Pindi Gheb road and the Dhakner road, that now carry a variety of traffic from pedestrians, bicycles, livestock, and carts to buses and trucks. Those roads are narrow, have less shoulder width, and have weaker beds than the proposed new access road, so the presence of construction traffic would pose a substantial risk to other traffic, particularly within Attock city, and to the construction vehicles themselves. Moreover, the loss of time incurred on such roads would impede the progress of the Project. Upgrading the existing road system was considered as an alternative to building a special access road. While that would partly ease the problem of congestion, it would substantially add to transit times and would increase the overall cost of the Project, as well as still requiring a bypass to avoid the congested areas of Attock city.
9.5.2 Alternative Routes Having determined the desirability of avoiding Attock city and, where possible, the use of the smaller rural roads, project planners needed to select the optimum terminal points for the access road. The western terminus obviously was the Power Complex site, while the eastern one was somewhere on the Attock- Haji Shah road. Although the shortest route would have branched from the Attock-Haji Shah road closer to Attock and another shorter route could have been found branching from the Attock- Haji Shah road farther north, the selected route offers several advantages:
It would minimise the taking of private land by using a government-owned right-of-way. It would not cross the Power Channel alignment, so it would not interfere with the construction of that Project component. It would avoid routing heavy vehicles through any populated areas, such as Attock city or Sarwala.
9.5.3 Alternative Rail Crossings
Consideration was given to crossing the Attock-Peshawar railway line at a grade crossing, instead of the planned bridge. The
9.12 grade crossing would be located about 300 m south of the proposed bridge, ie, at the end of the existing cut and before the track begins the embankment that carries it to the nullah bridge. It was felt that the occasional high frequency of trucks on the access road would necessitate a complex gate system at the crossing, which would be under the control of Pakistan Railways. Experience elsewhere has indicated that the Railways are reluctant to leave such gates permanently open for cross traffic and its operation might interfere with movements of vehicles on the road.
9.6 MITIGATION PLAN
9. 6.1 Compensation The construction of the Haji Shah-Barotha access road will not require resettlement. It will require, however, the acquisition of 19.8 ha of private land from landholders, whose titles are recorded in the land records of five villages. Current practice in Pakistan for the acquisition of land for roads is to use the Land Acquisition Act of 1894 only as a last resort. The National Highway Authority prefers direct negotiations on land prices with the landowners. According to highway authorities, this approach works more often than not and saves considerable time and litigation. WAPDA will use this approach. Landowners will be entitled to compensation for their land at the full market price, as determined by the Project Non-Governmental Organization (PNGO). This price will be the price of current transactions for various classes of land in the land market in Sarwala. WAPDA will accept the recommendation of the PNGO on market price and use this as the basis for negotiations with the landowners. Once the price is fixed, WAPDA will add 15 percent to the price of each plot. This is the standard escalation in the Land Acquisition Act for land taken by eminent domain.
In the event of any dispute as regards the compensation, the PNGO will facilitate the organisation of a committee of affected landowners in each village to negotiate with WAPDA. The committee should have the proxy in writing of each landowner giving the committee the authority to negotiate on that landowner's behalf. The committee and WAPDA should reach a unanimous agreement on the market prices both of barani land and uncultivated waste (ghair mumkin). This agreement will be explained to the landowners. WAPDA will provide each landowner with a Certificate of Compensation. This will state the exact amount the landowner is due. WAPDA will make direct payments to the affected landowners. The PNGO will keep a separate record of these payments and confirm that they have been received by the affected landowners.
a w The tenants, artisans and field labourers attached to the affected land will be eligible to entitlements under the Project Resettlement Action Plan (RAP). These include work permits and involvement in training and income self-generation programmes.
9.6.2 Public Safety Traffic Management In order to minimise the risks posed by heavy vehicles to other traffic, pedestrians and livestock, WAPDA will widen the Attock- Haji Shah road at its intersection with the access road to provide turning lanes for trucks entering or leaving the access road. The corners will be designed with sufficient radius of curvature that turning trucks (including those of unusual length) can negotiate the corners without intruding into oncoming traffic. The intersection of the access road with the Attock-Haji Shah road will be lighted, in order to improve visibility at night. A white centreline will be placed on the access road and lanes will be appropriately marked at the intersection. During periods of heavy traffic, a trained traffic control officer will be stationed at the intersection. Emergency Action
An Emergency Action Plan to cover accidents, spills, or other mishaps along the access road will be incorporated into the overall safety programme for the power complex construction contract. It will include giving instruction to drivers on proper emergency procedures, information on the locations and capabilities of health facilities, maintenance of emergency warning systems (lights, flares, etc.) on vehicles, communication equipment (with adequate instruction on its use), and a containment/recovery programme for noxious or dangerous cargo.
9.7 MONITORING PLAN 9.7.1 Land Acquisition and Compensation Land acquisition and compensation for the Haji Shah-Barotha road will be monitored under the terms of the Project Resettlement Action Plan (RAP). Under the RAP, land acquisition and compensation will be monitored by the WAPDA Environmental Cell and the Monitoring Consultants. The Monitoring Consultants will be contracted under the Project to assist WAPDA in the whole range of environmental and social monitoring activities associated with the Project.
9.14 9.7.2 Induced Development
The Haji Shah-Barotha access road will be monitored by WAPDA security staff, who will be responsible for preventing any unauthorised development along the road. In those areas where WAPDA will not have ownership, as along the Haji Shah-Attock road on both sides of the junction with the access road, the PNGO and WAPDA Environmental Cell will monitor at suitable intervals any induced development that emerges. In the event that this occurs, the PNGO will alert the authorities implementing the Ghazi- Barotha Regional Development Plan, so that proper planning and infrastructure can be brought to the site.
REFERENCES
9.1 Environment & Urban Affairs Division; Environmental Impact Assessment Guidelines, Vol I, Ministry of Housing & Works, Government of Pakistan, 1986.
9.2 World Bank, Environmental Assessment Sourcebook, Volumes I, II, and III, World Bank Tech.Papers 139, 140, and 154, 1991.
9.3 Paterson, T.T. and H.J.H. Drummond; Soan: The Palaeolithic of Pakistan, Govt. of Pakistan, Dept. of Archaeology, 1962.
9.4 Pakistan Hydro Consultants; Ghazi-Barotha Hydropower Project, Archaeological Survey Report, 1992.
9.5 Garrick, H.B.W.; Report. Tour Through Bihar, Central India, Peshawar, and Yusufzai, Archaeological Survey of India, Vol.XIX, 1881-82.
4
9.15 TABLE 9.1
HAJI SHAH - BAROTHAACCESS ROAD
IMPACTS. MITIGATIONAND MONITORING
RESOURCE IMPACT MITIGATION ACTION MONITORING
Agricultural Loss of 19.8 haof A. Compensationat full Detailedcensus of affected WAPDAEnvironmental Land barani land marketvalue populationland owners, Cell B. Participationof affected tenants,artisans, field landowing and rural labourers landlessgroups in Income Survey-Baseline compensations/benefits both by PNGOor an of Project,as under institutionengaged for this the RAP purpose
A. WAPDAnegotiates price directly with landowners
B. WAPDAacquires land under Land Acquisition Act
Full scope of RAPapplies in eithercase
Rural Roads Induced strip Zonal planningand basic WAPDAmaintains its own WAPDAEnvironmental Highways development servicesunder GBRDO property clear of induced Cell development. PNGOobserves for potential developmentalong public roads. AdvisesGBRDO
PublicSecurity Decreasedsafety Traffic Managementat WAPDAto provide lighting, WAPDAEnvironmental Intersectionof Access turning lanes, lane markings, Cell Road & Haji Shah Attock Rd & traffic controllor (at busy periods).
PublicSecurity Accidents,Spillage EmergencyAction Plan To be developed by WAPDA WAPDAEnvironmental and local land of oils, toxic Specialfire & Clean up Cell and water chemicals,etc equipmentto be maintained resources at BarothaWAPDA Colony. Trainingin handling of toxic spills for firemen
9.16 l
DRAWINGS
\*